АУДИРОВАНИЕ begginer

  • Аудио
  • Занимательные материалы
  • Контроль знаний
  • Повышение квалификации
  • Подготовка к тестированию
  • Работа в классе
  • Рабочие тетради
  • Разработки курсов
  • pdf
  • 28.04.2018
Публикация в СМИ для учителей

Публикация в СМИ для учителей

Бесплатное участие. Свидетельство СМИ сразу.
Мгновенные 10 документов в портфолио.

Публикация является частью публикации:

Иконка файла материала New Headway. Beginner_Teasher's book_Am. Maris, Liz and John Soars_2nd Edition_2002 -148p.pdf

Beginner Teacher's Book


Zaavvav

Beginner

Teacher's Book

Amanda Maris

Liz and John Soars

OXFORD

UNIVERSITY PRESS


Contents

              Introduction                                                                                                                           4

             Teaching beginners — tips and techniques                                                                                6

Unit I          am/is/are • my/pur • This is . . . • How are you? • What's this in English?

             Numbers 1—10 and plurals                                                                                                        8

Unit 2

Unit

                            Countries • VThereare vou from? • he/she/they • his/her • Numbers 1 1—30                          13

Jobs • am/are/is — negatives and questions • Address, phone number

                    Social expressions                                                                                                                     19

Unit 4 our/their • Possessive 's • Family relations • has/hcnv • The alphabet • On the phone 26 Unit 5 Sports, food, and drinks • Present Simple— I/you/they • a/an

               Languages and nationalities • Numbers and prices                                                                33

Unit 6            The time • Present Simple — he/she/it • usually/sometimes/never

               Questions and negatives • Words that go together • Davs of the week                                 40

Unit 7         Question words • it/them • this/ that • Adjectives • Can I                                                   47

Unit 8         Rooms and furniture • There is/are • any • Prepositions • Directions                                54

Unit 9     Saying years • was/were born • Past Simple — irregular verbs • When's your birthday?      61

Unit 10   Past Simple— regular and irregular • Questions and negatives • Sports and leisure

                    Filling in forms                                                                                                                         68

Unit 11    cnn/can't • Requests and offers • Verbs and nouns that go together

              What's the problem7                                                                                                                76

Unit 12

Unit 13

want and would like • Food and drink • In a restaurant • Going shopping 83 Colours and clothes • Present Continuous • Questions and negatives

              What's the matter?                                                                                                                    90

Unit 14    Present Continuous for future • Question word revision • Travel and transport

              Going sightseeing                                                                                                                     97

StoaN

PHOTOCOPIABLE MATERIALS                                                       

              Photocopiable materials and Extra ideas 106               Progress tests                 121

            Units 1—4                                                       106               Stop and checks             130

                  Units 5—8                                                        109

             Units 9—12                                                      113                Answer keys                    142

              Units                                                                118


Introduction


New Headway Beginner is a foundation course for adult and young adult absolute beginners. It is also suitable for students who have already learned a little English, perhaps some years ago, but who don't yet feel confident enough to move on. They want to go back before they move forward. New language is introduced gradually and methodically, in measured amounts, and in a logical order. Vocabulary has been selected carefully to avoid overloading. There are many controlled practice activities which aim to give beginners the confidence to proceed, but there is also some simple skills work, which incorporates manageable communicative activities appropriate for the low level. In the Everyday English section, we deal with social and functional language, and survival skills.

Organization of the course

The organization of New Headway Beginner is similar to New Headway Elementary and New Headway PreIntermediate. Each unit has these components:

     Starter

     Presentation of new language

     Practice

 Vocabulary

   Skills work — always speaking, combined with reading and/or listening and/or writing

   Everyday English

STARTER

The Starter section is designed to be a warmer to the lesson and has a direct Link with the unit to come. This link might be topical or grammatical, or it might revise input from a previous unit.

PRESENTATION OF NEW LANGUAGE

New language items are presented through texts, mainly dialogues, which students can read and listen to at the same time. This enables students to relate the spelling to the sounds of English, and helps with pronunciation, as well as form and use. Sometimes there are two presentation sections. This is to break up what would otherwise be too large a 'chunk' of new language.

Introduction

The main verb forms taught are:  to be

    Present Simple

    there is/are

    Past Simple

    can/can't

    I'd like

    Present Continuous for now and future

We have chosen not to teach have got, for two reasons. Firstly, its Present Perfect form (have + the past participle) is confusing as have got refers to the present, not the past; secondly, have with its do/does/did forms is perfectly acceptable This pattern has the advantage of fitting in with all the other verbs that students are learning.

There are Grammar Spots in the presentation sections. These aim to focus students' attention on the language of the unit. There are questions to answer, charts to complete, and short exercises. The Grammar Spot ends by cueing a section of the Grammar Reference at the back of the book.

PRACTICE

This section contains a variety of controlled and freer practice exercises. The primary skills used are speaking and listening, but there is also some reading and writing. There are information gap exercises, mingle activities, information transfer listening exercises, questionnaires, and a lot of personalized activities. There are exercises where the aun is overt analysis of the grammar, such as Check it.

VOCABULARY

There is a strong lexical syllabus in New Headway Beginner. The vocabulary is carefully graded and recycled throughout, so that students don't suffer from overloading. Lexical sets are selected according to two criteria. They complement the grammatical input, for example, daily activities with the Present Simple; or members of the family with apostrophe 's. However, they are mainly chosen for their usefulness.

Low-level students need to know the words of everyday life — food, sports, numbers, dates, travel, time, jobs, describing people and places, shopping, sightseeing, saying how you feel.

Skills work

LISTENING

ar unseen listening sections, In dialogue or monologue form, provide further practice of the language of the unit and, later in the course, help to develop students' ability to understand the main message of a text.

READING

At the beginning of the course, the language in the readings is tightly controlled and graded, and only one or two words be unknown to the students, As the course progresses, the readings become longer, with slightly more unfamiliar vocabularv in the texts. This gives students practice in dealing with new words and prepares them for the longer texts in New Headway Elementary.

SPEAKING

In the presentation sections, students have the opportunity to practise the pronunciation and Intonation of new language In the practice sections, less controlled exercises lead to freer speaking practice-

There are many speaking exercises based around the listening and reading activities. There is speaking to do before a text, to launch the topic and make students interested; and there are speaking activities after a text, often in the form of discussion.

WRITING

Writing exercises are usuallv, but not always, small in scope. Students are invited to write about their best friend, a postcard, a short introduction to their home town, and a description of a holiday,

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

This is a very important part of the syllabus of New Headway Beginner. There is language input and practice of several kinds:

     survival skills, such as numbers, saying dates, the alphabet, saying prices, filling in forms, and asking for directions

     social skills, such as social expressions and greetings

     functional areas, such as making requests, going shopping, and saying how you feel

There is sometimes an element of 'phrasebook language' in these sections. We are not asking students to analyse too deeply how a piece of language operates. For example, in Unit 7 we introduce Can I in a variety of situations. We don't want teachers or students to worry too much about a modal verb that inverts in the question and doesn't take do/does. We merely want students to see how this phrase can be used to get what you want in a polite manner.

GRAMMAR REFERENCE

This is at the back of the Student's Book, and it is intended for use at home. It can be used for revision or for reference.

REVISION

There ate four Stop and check tests on PPI 30—139 Of the Teacher's Book. There are also three Progress tests, on pp121—127

Workbook

All the language input — grammatical, lexical, and functional — is revisited and practised. There are also vocabulary, pronuncut:on. and listening exercises.

iVorkbook Cassette/CD accompanies the

There are listen and repeat exercises, and also unseen lister,ings. The cassette/CD is particularly beneficial to students who lack confidence in speaking and who have listerung or pronunciation problems.

 Most the exercises in the Workbook can be completed Without the cassette/CL.). However, a small number (e.g. the unseen will require students to listen to the rec07±z. Students for whom this is not possible can refer to the upescripts on p81.

Teacher's Resource Book

cor:atns photocopiable games and activities to supplement the main course material.

Video

A            Headway Beginner Video, Video Guide, and Activity

Book available to accompany the course. The video takes of six episodes centred around four people sharing a souse Oxford. The first episode can be shown after

4. and subsequent episodes after Units 6, S, 10, 12, and 14.

Finaihy!

The Sasic criterion for selection of every activity in New

Beginner is its usefulness for the survival of a IOWlevel student in an English-speaking environment. The book a package that     fit neatly in the suitcase! We are to lav the foundations for what we hope will be a successtul and enjoyable language-learning future.

Introduction 5

A step-by-step approach

Beginners require a very careful, staged approach with plenty of repetition, practice, and revision to help them internalize new language and to give them confidence. Suggested stages are as follows:

STARTER

This short warmer to the lesson must not be allowed to go on too long. Generally speaking, five minutes is the maximum.

PRESENTATION OF LANGUAGE POINT

You can vary the presentations if you like, Sometimes it is useful to play a recording first while the students look at the picture with the text covered. Then, after that, they can read and listen. This method may be helpful for some non-European students who are not very familiar with Roman script.

LISTENING AND REPEATING (DRILLING)

When introducing a new item of language, stop and practise pronunciation when students have grasped the meaning. You can use the recording as a model, or provide the model yourself. There are short pauses on the recording; you will need to stop the tape/CD to give students time to repeat at an appropriate pace. Allow students to listen to the word, phrase, or sentence two or three times before you ask them to repeat it. For example, to drill the sentence HOW are you? Play the recording and/or model the sentence yourself two or three times using the same pronunciation and intonation, then ask the students as a class to repeat the phrase, i.e. choral drilling. Don't say it with them, but instead listen to what they are saying. Say Again for them to repeat a second time. If it sounds as if they have got it right, ask one or two students individually to say it again for you to check,

i.e. individual drilling. If the choral repetition doesn't sound right, remodel the phrase for students to listen to again, then have them repeat chorally again, before moving on to individual drilling.

PRACTICE

Move carefully from controlled to freer practice. Beginners require plenty of practice in order both to get their mouths round new language and vocabulary, and also to internalize and remember it, Don't stint on practice or revision, but equally do not spend too long on any one thing, or the students may get bored and switch off. You can always come back later and do more work on it.

Introduction — Teaching beginners

TEACHING BEGINNERS - TIPS AND TECHNIQUES          

The following techniques ensure enough practice as well as variety.

pairwork

A lot of work can be done in pairs. Open and closed pairwork are often referred to in the teaching notes.

Open pairwork

As a stage after drilling and before closed pairwork, you can call on two students at a time to practise the lines of a dialogue, ask and answer a question, etc. across the room, with the rest of the class listening.

Do open pairwork:

   to set up and demonstrate a closed pairwork activity

   to check understanding of a task

   to check students' grammar, pronunciation, and intonation before they go on to closed pairwork

   after a closed pairwork activity or a written exercise to check performance of the task.

Don't call on the whole class to perform open pairwork. Two or three pairs of students, each performing one or two exchanges, should be sufficient to check language. More than this may make the activity drag and become boring.

Closed pairwork

With closed pairwork, students talk and listen only to eaCh other. This gives them more speaking time and a chance to practise with a peer without having to 'perform' in front of you and the class. It is important, though, for you to monitor students' performances unobtrusively. This will help vou to identify persistent errors and misunderstandings- Do not interrupt and correct students while you monitor unless absolutely necessary, as this inhibits fluency Instead, make a note of persistent errors and put some of them on the board for students to correct afterwards. ( It is probably not necessary to identify the culprits!)

Chain practice

This is a good way of using flashcards in a practice speaking activitv. It offers variety, a change of pace, and a lot of speaking practice of the language point without becoming boring. The following example describes a way of using flashcards of famous people.

I Stand in a circle with the students, with the flashcards in vour hand.

2    Turn to Sl on your left. show the first card, and ask a question, e.g. name? SI answers, and receives the flashcard from vou.

3    Sl then turns to S2 and asks the same question. S2 answers, and receives the card.

4    While Sl is asking £. turn to SA on your right, show the second card, and ask the question What's his/her name?

SA answers, receives the card, and turns to ask SB.

5    mile SA is asking turn back to SI with the third flashcard, and ask same question,

6    Continue the process until all the flashcards are in circulation and the students are asking and answering. There will be a bottleneck when the student opposite you starts getting from both sides at once, but it's part of the fun. Even:uallv the flashcards should all come back to you. This prac:ise game can get fast and furious!

Classroom practices

iThether you have a monolingual or a multilingual class, it will save a great deal of time and effort if, at the beginning, vou set up clear classroom practices and establish familiar routines. This will quicklv provide comfort and reassurance for beginners who can find it nerve-racking to deal with a new and alien language. Also. many complete beginners are adults who haven't been in the classroom for a long time, and whose previous experience of learning a language was probably very different.

CLASSROOM LANGUAGE

Numbers 1—30 and the alphabet will have been introduced bv Unit 4 so that you can refer students to page and exercise numbers in English, and spell words for them. You could also spend a little time at the beginning pre-teaching some useful

classroom language, e.g. Sorry, I don't understand, Can you spell it, please? and instructions, e.g. Work with a partner, Read, Listen, Repeat, All together, Again, Homework, etc. All of this will enable you to keep an 'English' atmosphere.

When having to give instructions for an activity, rehearse them beforehand so that they are simple, clear, and concise, and demonstrate rather than explain wherever possible, Avoid repeating vourself or over-explaining, as it tends only to create further contusion-

EXPLAINING NEW VOCABULARY

Explanation of new vocabularv to beginners can be problematic. particularly in multilingual classes, and/or where vou have no knowledge of the students' mother tongue, Make sure that students have a simple bilingual

Use pictures and/or draw on the board whenever possible. DO not worry if you are not a brilliant artist — simple line drawings are very quick and effective. Start collec:mg flashcards, posters, photos, etc. to help you. Example sentences with the new word in context are often better than explanations. Giving a similar word or the opposite can also be useful, e.g. finish = stop, go to bed.

PRONUNCIATION OF NEW VOCABULARY

introduce new vocabulary, make sure you drill the pronunciation of the words as well. This should be done after the meaning has been established so that students are not mouthing words that they do not understand. It is also a good idea to get yourself into the habit of highlighting and marking up on the board the main stress of new words, and having students copy this down, e.g. teacher or te_gcher.

USE OF MOTHER TONGUE

There can be no doubt that it is useful to know the students' own language (1.1), especially if you have a monolingual class. How much you use it is another matter. It is probably best to use it sparingly:

*     Perhaps in the first lesson talk to students in LI about the course, how they will work, etc. and explain that you will be using English with them.

*     Perhaps use Ll to check instructions for a new and unfamiliar activity, or to check understanding of a new language point, but only after using English.

*     You can use Ll for translation of new vocabulary (where there is a one-to-one direct translation) and to deal with students' queries, particularly when it would waste a lot of time trying to explain in English. Otherwise, you may find that ifbeginners feel that it is acceptable to use their own language freely in the classroom, they are inhibited from taking the plunge and speaking English to you and to each other, and it becomes more difficult for them to make that important leap.

Introduction — Teaching beginners


Introduction to the unit

Starting Unit I of New Headway Beginner probably marks the beginning of a new course with a new group of students. The title of Unit I is 'Hello!' and aims to let the students get to know

each other and you, and for you to get to know them of course! The context of greetings and introductions in different settings allows students to do this and shows them how they can communicate in English in a meaningful way with even quite basic language.

Key language aims are also fulfilled with the introduction of parts of to be, the introduction of some basic vocabulary (including some international words), numbers I—10, and -s/-es plural endings.

1 •

am/are/is, my/your • This is .. How are you? • What's this in English? Numbers 1—10 and plurals

Hello!                                                                                 

Language aims

Grammar — am/are/is The verb to be is introduced in the singular with the subjects I, you, this, and it (he/she/they are introduced in Unit 2). The focus is on the positive and on questions with the question words what and how. (The question words are introduced through the fUnctions of meeting people and greeting: What's your name?, How are you?, and talking about objects; What's this in English? Other question words are introduced and reviewed systematically throughout the course.)

Possessive adjectives My and your are introduced in the unit, with the other possessive adjectives being presented across the first four units of the course. Vocabulary A set of key everyday words is introduced, some of which are international words, e.g. camera. There is an opportunity to extend this basic set via the classroom context.

Everyday English Numbers 1—10 and -s/-es noun plurals are introduced and practised. Students are introduced to the pronunciation of the -s/-es plural endings:

/z] books           houses

Workbook To be and my/yourare consolidated through further practice on greetings and introductions; key vocabulary, numbers          O and -s/-es plurals are also practised.

Notes on the unit

T 1.1

Smile, greet the class, and say your own name — Hello, I'm (Liz). Point to yourself to make the meaning clear. Point to the speech bubbles and play the recording.

Invite students to say their own name, including the greeting Hello. If you have a very large group, you could ask a few students to say their name and then get students to continue in pairs. Keep this stage brief as students will have the opportunity to introduce themselves and each other in the next section.

WHAT'S YOUR NAME?

 

am/are/is, my/your

T 1.2

1Focus attention on the photos of Sandra and Hiro. Point to the conversation on p6 and ask students to read and listen. Play the recording through once

Play the recording twice more, first pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat as a class. Students then repeat lines individually before practising the conversation in open and then in closed pairs (see Teaching Beginners Tips and Techniques, TB p6). Encourage an accurate voice range — the amount by which pitch of the voice changes. (Many languages do not use such a wide voice range as English so this needs to be actively encouraged.) Also make sure students can accurately reproduce the contracted forms I'm and name's. If necessary, model the sentences again yourself to help emphasize the pronunciation in a visual way.

GRAMMAR SPOT

Focus attention on the contractions. Ask students to circle the contracted forms in exercise l. Demonstrate

this by writing the conversation on the board and puttting a circle round the first contraction I'm.

2     This is a mingle activity. Demonstrate the conversation with one student for the rest of the class. Then ask another two students to repeat the conversation in open pairs (see Teaching Beginners Tips and Techniques, TB p6). Demonstrate the meaning of 'stand up' and get the students to move around the class practising the conversation. You may like to encourage them to shake hands as they introduce themselves, particularly if they don't know each other. Monitor and check for pronunciation.

This is ...

3     This section focuses on introducing people in a slightly more formal context, giving surnames as well as first names. Give your first name again: I'm Liz Write it on the board: Liz is myfirst name. Then say your surname and write it on the board: My surname is Brown. Repeat I'm Liz Brown — Liz is my first name, Brown is my surname. Then ask a student whose first name you know: Mayumi — Mayumi is your first name, what's your surname? Elicit surnames from other students.

Focus attention on the photo of Sandra, Hiro, and John on p7. Point to the conversation and ask students to read and listen. Play the recording through once. Play the recording again and get students to point to the correct characters as they are referred to in the conversation.

Play the recording twice more, first pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat as a class. Students then repeat lines individually before practising the conversation in open and then in closed pairs.

Encourage accurate pronunciation of the short sound /1/ and of the linking:

/1//1/

this is John Mason

4 Point to the gapped conversation. Choose two confident students to demonstrate the conversation with you for the rest of the class. Introduce the students to each other and encourage them to shale hands when they say Hello. Choose two more groups of three to practise the       conversation in front of the class.

Divide the class into groups of three and get each student take it in turns to introduce the other two. Monitor and check for pronunciation and intonation. Depending on the class, when the activity is over, you         may like to ask one or two groups to go through the conversation again while the whole class listens.

SUGGESTION

If appropriate, you can play a memory game based on the students' names. Ask one student to go round the class saying everyone's name while the other students hdp if necessary. Encourage students in a multilingual group to pronounce everyone's name as accurately as possible. (You might want to do the memory game yourself, too, to make sure you have remembered all the students' names!)

How are you?

5      Focus attention on the photo of Sandra and John on p8. Check students can remember the names of the characters by asking Who's this? Point to the speech bubbles in the photo and ask students to read and listen. Play the recording through once.

Play the recording twice more, first pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat as a class. Students then repeat lines individually before practising the conversation in open and then in closed pairs. Encourage accurate stress and intonation on the       questions:

How are you?

And you?

6     Focus attention on the photo of John and Hiro          on p8. Check students can remember the names of the characters. Follow the same procedure as for exercise 1.

Fine, / Very well, thanks. And you? Reply to each student in turn. Make sure students realize that And you? requires an answer Fine, /Very well, thanks.

                                                                                                                                                                  1         Hello! 9

7     Ask individual students How are you? to elicit the answer

Then get students to ask and answer you and each other in open pairs across the class. It may be helpful to gesture to your partner when you say And you? to aid comprehension.

8     This is another mingle activity. (You may like to develop a gesture which means finingle'.) Focus attention on the speech bubbles. If necessary, check comprehension of OK, fine, very well with simple board drawings of faces — a straight face for OK e, a half smile for fine e, and a frill smile for very well@. Demonstrate the conversation with one student for the rest of the class. Then ask another two students to repeat the conversation in open pairs. Get the students to move around the class practising the conversation. Monitor and check for pronunciation and intonation.

 

GRAMMAR SPOT

Focus attention on the gapped sentences. Elicit the word to complete the first sentence with the whole class as an example (am). Then ask students to complete the other sentences.

Read Grammar Reference 1.1 and 1.2 on p121 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home.

Encourage them to ask you questions about it, in LI if appropriate.

PRACTICE

 

 

 

Introductions

I Focus attention on the photos and conversations. Give students 30 seconds to read. Hold up the book so the class can see the photos. Read out the first line of the first conversation and point to the female character in the photo. Ask Anna or Ben? Point to the male and ask Who's this? Elicit the identities of Carla and David for the second photo.

It is a good idea to write the first conversation gap-fill on the board and do it with the whole class, as students may not be familiar with this kind of exercise. Write students' suggestions (right or wrong) in the gaps.

T 1.6

Play the conversations for students to listen and check. See if they can hear and correct any mistakes themselves before you offer correction. Then check the answers with the whole class.

I

Get students to practise the conversations first in open pairs and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation. If necessary, model the conversations again, either yourself or from the tape, and get students to practise again.

2 If students had few problems with the gap-fills in exercise l, you could put them in pairs to try to complete the conversations in exercise 2 together. Go round and monitor, but don't correct any mistakes yet.

T 1.7

Play the conversations for students to listen and check before you check the answers with the whole class.

Answers and tapescript

I B Hello, Anna. Hwareyou?

A Fine, thanks, Ben. And pa?

Get students to practise the conversations first in open pairs and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation. If necessary, model the conversations again, either yourself or from the tape, and get students to practise again.

T 1.8

3Focus attention on the conversation and play the recording. Make it clear that students should just listen the first few times and not try to fill in the answers. Play the recording twice more, then write the first line up on the board and elicit what the second should be. Get them to fill in the number 2 on the correct line in their books, then finish the exercise individually or in pairs. Play the recording again for them to check their answers. Elicit the whole conversation in the correct order from the class and put it on the board for the practice stage which follows.

As this is a longer conversation than the students have practised up to now, play the recording two or three times and get the students to repeat chorally and individually. Then get them to continue in groups of three. (If appropriate, get them to stand up as this often encourages a more dynamic performance!) Let students refer to the correct order on the board, but discourage them from reading it word for word, as they will lose the correct intonation and not make eye contact with the other students. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation and intonation. If you think more practice is needed at this stage, get students to repeat the conversation using their own names.

Read Grammar Reference 1.3 on p121 together.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit I

Exercises 1—5 These provide further practice on greetings and introductions.

VOCABULARY

 

 

Whats this in English?

I Manyofthe words in the lexical set maybe known to the students as they are 'international' words or may be similar in their own language. Focus on the example and then get students to work individually or in pairs or groups of three to match the rest of the words to the photos. Monitor and check for correct spelling. Check the answers with the whole class-

Play the recording and get students to listen and repeat the words, Check for accurate word stress and, if necessary, explain the system of stress marks used in New Headway by writing the words with more than one syllable on the board and highlighting the stress:

photograph

sandwich

television

hamburger

computer

camera

T 1.10

3Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Demonstrate the conversation by pointing to the example in I and asking What's this in English? Elicit the reply It's a photograph. Play the recording and get students to repeat. Point to different pictures on p 10 and get students to ask and answer in open pairs. Check for accurate pronunciation of It's a and if students produce * Is a, repeat the drill.

Students then continue asking and answering about the objects in exercise I , working in closed pairs.

GRAMMAR SPOT

Focus attention on the contracted form. Ask students to circle the same form in the conversation.

4 Pick up a book and ask What's this in English? Elicit the reply It's a book. Pick up another object that students don't know how to say in English and elicit the question What's this in English? Give the answer It's a (dictionary). Students then continue picking up or going to objects in the classroom and asking and answering. Write up the words on the board and highlight the word stress if necessary. (Try to avoid words beginning with a vowel and the need for students to use an. Also, try to limit students' questions to vocabulary that will be useful to them at this stage in their learning, e.g. pen, dictionary, and try not to let the activity go on too long!)

SUGGESTION

You can ask students for more examples of 'international' words or cognates with the students' own language (e.g. supermarket, cinema, hospital, telephone, video, cassette, radio, tennis, golf, football). Put the words on the board and practise the pronunciation.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit I

Exercises 6 and 7 These provide further practice on vocabulary and pronunciation.

Exercise 8 In this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

I Hello! 11

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

 

Numbers 1—10 and plurals

SUGGESTION

Students need a lot of practice with numbers, so from now on, use numbers as much as possible when referring to pages and exercises. Continue to do quick number revisions in future lessons, especially as more numbers are introduced, This can include number dictations, either with you dictating or with the students working in pairs:

Teacher dictation: Say numbers at random, writing them down yourself so that you have a means of checking. Students write the figures, not the words, as you say them. Have one student read their list of num bers out to check

Pairs dictation: Students prepare a list of random figures to dictate to their partner. They take it in turns to dictate their list. The student who is taking down the dictated numbers writes the figures, not the words, and then reads the list back to their partner to check the answers.

Make sure you limit the range of numbers to those covered at any stage in the course, e.g. Unit I: numbers

1—10.

T 1 .1 1

1Play the recording once and get students to read and listen to the numbers. Write two and eight on the board and put a stroke through the w and the gh to show that they are silent. Play the recording again and get students to repeat. Get students to say the numbers round the class, starting again at one once they reach ten. You can also get students to say the numbers in reverse order if appropriate. If students need more practice, write figures at random on the board and get students to say the numbers as you write.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 1

Exercises 9—11 These provide further practice on numbers.

2 This exercise presents and practises formation of plurals with -s/-es, and reviews the vocabulary from this unit and numbers 1—10. Focus attention on the pictures and get students to count the objects/people and say the correct number, e.g. 1 ten.

Look at the example with the whole class. Then get students to complete the rest of the exercise, referring back to the list of numerals and words at the top of the page. Monitor and check for correct spelling.

T 1.12

Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Get students to write the words on the board as a final check.

I

GRAMMAR SPOT

Focus attention on the singular nouns and the plural noun endings, Ask students to underline the plural endings in exercise I.

Refer students to Grammar Reference 1.4 on p121.

T 1.1)

3Play the recording through once and let students just listen. Play the recording again and get the students to repeat chorally and individually.

Refer students to Grammar Reference 1.4 on p121 and highlight the use of the - ies plural, e.g. city — cities.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit I

Exercises 12 and 13 These exercises provide further practice on plurals. Exercise 13 recycles numbers.

Don't forget!

Word list

Ask the students to turn to p128 and look at the word list for Unit I. Explain that this contains important words from the unit. GO through the words in class and then ask students to learn the words for homework. Test them on a few of the words in the following lesson.


Introduction to the unit

The title of Unit 2 is 'Your world' and it focuses on countries and cities, and talking about where people are from. The characters introduced in Unit I are shown again in a different context. The syllabus of Wh- question words is reviewed and extended, and students continue with numbers 11—30. In terms of skills, students meet their first unseen listening task and also a short reading text. These are important first steps in developing listening and reading skills and help to prepare students for handling progressively longer listening and reading texts across the course.

Countries

Where are you from? • he/she/they his/her • Numbers 11-30

Your world                                                                                            

Language aims

Grammar — Where are you from?; he/she/they Students build on the Whquestions introduced in Unit I with the introduction of Where are you from? The verb to be with I and you is consolidated and also extended to include he/she/they.

Possessive adjectives His and her are introduced and my and your are reviewed from Unit l.

Vocabulary A set of common cities and countries are introduced.

Everyday English The numbers syllabus is extended to cover 11—30.

Workbook The key lexical set Of countries and cities is reviewed, including focuses on spelling and pronunciation.

He/she and his/her is consolidated through gap-fill activities.

Talking about where people are from is further practised through gap-fill activities, and reading and listening tasks.

Numbers 11—30 are practised in a range of activities.

POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

    Beginners often make mistakes with he/she and his/her (especially if subject pronouns are not used and/or if the possessives are expressed differently in their own language). The course provides a lot of practice on this possible area of confusion, but be prepared to monitor and check the use of he/she and his/her and go over these points whenever problems occur. Further confusion is possible with the contracted form he's. It's worth taking the time to drill the pronunciation of his /h1Z/ and he's /hi;zj to help students perceive and produce the difference.

    Students often have problems distinguishing •teen' numbers (13—19) from 'ten' numbers (30, 40' 50, etc.). Highlight the different word Stress:

     thirteen        thirty                fourteen       forty

Notes on the unit

SUGGESTION

Take the opportunity to review the greetings covered in Unit 1 at the beginning of each class. Greet each student as they arrive in class and ask how they are, Encourage students to greet each other in English so that they get into the habit Of using the language they have learnt in a meaningful way.



I Focus attention on the countries in the box and on the map on pl 3. Demonstrate the activity by getting students to locate Australia on the map. Students continue locating the countries in exercise I on the map, working in pairs. If there is any disagreement, check the answers with the whole class.

Get students to write their own country on the map. Remind them of the question What's in English? from Unit 1 so that they can ask you for the name of their country, e.g. What's (Belgique) in English? (If you do not recognize the name of the country in the students' mother tongue, then ask them to point it out on the map.) Write up the names of the countries on the board and drill the pronunciation as necessary.

2 T 2.1 Play the recording and get the students to repeat chorally and individually. Pay particular attention to stress. If you have a lot of students from other countries, get them to say the name of their country and check their pronunciation.

1 This conversation introduces the second person question form. Focus attention on the photos of Sandra and Hiro, who appeared in Unit I. Point to the conversation and ask students to read and listen. Play the recording through once. Play the recording again and then ask Where's Spain? Where's Japan? Get students


4


Encourage accurate reproduction of the contrastive stress in the questions, and of the falling intonation:

Where are you from?

Where are you from?

This is another mingle activity. If you have a multilingual class, make sure that all the students' countries are written on the board and practised beforehand. If you have a monolingual class, you might like to teach them I'm from (town/city) in (country) to vary the answers. Demonstrate the conversation with one student for the rest of the class. Then ask another two students to repeat , the conversation in open pairs. Get the students to move around the class practising the conversation. Monitor and check for pronunciation.

T 2 .3

Focus attention on the photos of Hiro and Sandra. Point to the sentences and ask students to read and listen. Play the recording through once. Play the recording again and get students to repeat. Encourage students to reproduce the long and short sounds in his and he's

/i:/

His name's Hiro. He's from Japan.

GRAMMAR SPOT

Focus attention on the contractions. Ask students to circle the contracted forms in exercise 3.

Read Grammar Reference 2.1 and 2.2 on p121 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it.

Write the sentences about Hiro on the board. Circle his and he. Repeat His name's Hiro, he'sfrom Japan and model the sentence on another male class member: His name's Erdi, he's from Turkey. Now contrast with a female student: BUT Her name's Ali, she's from Indonesia. Write up the sentences about Sandra and circle Her and She. Elicit more examples from the class to consolidate the use of he/she and his/her.

Focus attention on the passport photos on p13. Read sentence I with the whole class, Students continue working individually and then check their answers in pairs.


to point to the correct part of the map.

Play the recording again, pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat as a class. Students then repeat lines individually before practising the conversation in open and then in closed pairs.

 Play the recording through once and let students check their answers, Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 2

Exercises 1—3 These provide further practice of the countries introduced in the Student's Book.

Exercise 5 This introduces the countries in the United Kingdom.

Questions

5     T 2 5 This exercise introduces third person question forms. Play the recording and get the students to repeat chorally and individually. Check students can reproduce the falling intonation of the wh- questions.

GRAMMAR SPOT                           

Focus attention on the contraction where's. Ask students to circle the contraction where's in exercise 5. Check students recognize What's in exercise 5 as the contraction of What is.

Focus attention on the gapped sentences. Complete the first sentence with the whole class as an example (is). Then ask students to complete the other sentences.

Mære are you from?

Refer students to Grammar Reference 2.3 on PI 21.

6     Go through the photographs on p13 yourself first asking What's his/her name? and Where's he/she from? and eliciting the answers, before getting students to do the same in pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of he/she and his/her.

SUGGESTIONS

• If students need fUrther practice with I/you, my/your, he/she, and his/her, make a photocopy of TB p 106 and cut out the role cards. This exercise provides further practice by giving students a new name and country. The cards provide a male and a female name from each of the countries in the Student's Book and also from the countries introduced in exercise 5 in Unit 2 of the Workbook ( Wales Scotland, and Northern

Ireland). Canada is also included from later in the unit. You can either just use the cards with the countries introduced in the Student's Book, or pre-teach/check the other countries.

  Review the exchanges What's your name? My name's (Robert). Where are you from? I'm from (the United States), writing them on the board if necessary. Also review when to use he/she.

  Give the role cards out to the students, telling them this is their new name and country. Ask students to stand up and go round the class asking and answering the question. Tell them they must try to remember everyone's new name and country.

  When students have finished, point to various students and ask the class What's his/her name? and Where's he/she from? If the class is good, you can also check with the student in question whether the class has remembered correctly, asking Is that right?, and having them answer Yes or No.

  Alternatively, or in addition to the above suggestion, you could bring in pictures Of famous people for further practice. You could use them for open pairwork, or you could try a question and answer chain as follows:

SD

    9                                        sc

      52                                                         SB

I Stand in a circle with the students, with the pictures in your hand.

2      Thrn to SI on your left, show the first card and ask What's his/her name? and Where's he/she from? Sl answers, and receives the picture from you.

3      SI then turns to S2 and asks the same question. S2 answers, and receives the picture.

4      While Sl is asking S2, turn to SA on your right, show the second picture, and ask the question What's his/her name? and Where's he/she from? SA answers, receives the picture, and turns and asks SB,

5      While SA is asking SB, turn back to SI again with the third picture, and ask the question.

6      Continue the process until all the pictures are in circulation and the students are asking and

answering. There will probably be a bottleneck when the student opposite you starts getting questions from both sides at once, but that's part Of the fun. Eventually the pictures should all come back to you.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 2

Exercise 6 This consolidates he/she — his/her.

Exercise 7 This focuses on Where are you from? and also reviews the greetings from Unit I.

PRACTICE

Cities and countries

I Focus attention on the names of the cities on p14 and drill the pronunciation chorally and individually. Model the conversation and get students to repeat chorally. Students repeat the conversation with a different city, e.g. Paris, in open pairs. Students continue working in closed pairs.

T 2.6

Play the recording and let students check their answers.

Answers and tapescrípt

       Whereg Nyo?                   It's in Japan.

     Wherek Paris?                   It's in France.

     Where's Barcelona?          It's in Spain.

Milan?            It's in Italy. Where's Oxford?           oles in England.

Wherds Rio de Janeiro? It's in Brazil.

Where' Boston? It's in the United State WherúSythey?L Vs in Australia.

2 This is the first information gap exercise that students have encountered in the book, and it therefore needs careful setting up. Make sure students understand that they shouldn't look at each other's pages until the end of the activity. Each student has the name and country/city of four of the eight people in the photos, The aim is for each student to find out about the other four by asking their partner• If possible, explain this using the students' own language and demonstrate a couple of question and answer exchanges with a good student yourself first. Remind students of the forms they will need to talk about the men and women in the photos ( What's his/her name? and Where's he/shefrom?). Drill all four questions again if necessary.

Divide the class into pairs and make sure students kaww if they are Student A or B. Student A should look at p 14 in the unit and Student B at pl 38 at the end Of the book.

Students can refer to each photo by saying the number. They should write their answers in the spaces provided.

While the students are asking and answering about the people in the photos, go round monitoring and helping out. If the names cause problems, get students to write them on a separate piece of paper and show it to their partner. When they have finished, you can check by asking individual students to tell you about one of the people in the photos. Say Tell me about number one, etc.

Talking about you

3 Point to a few students and ask the class What's his/her name? and Where's he/she from? Focus attention on the speech bubbles and get students to practise the questidns and answers in open pairs across the class. Then get students to replace the examples in exercise 3 with students' names and countries and to include the name of a city/town if appropriate. Students continue working in closed pairs.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 2

Exercise 4 This reviews towns and countries.

Questions and answers

4 Focus attention on the photo of Sandra and Luis on p 15. Ask students What's her name? about Sandra and elicit the answer. Ask What's his name? about Luis and use the opportunity to elicit/teach I don 't know. Play the conversation through once and get students to complete as many gaps as possible. (With a weaker group, you may want to let them listen through once before they fill in the gaps.) Play the conversation again and get students to complete their answers, Check the answers with the whole class.

Answers Ed tapa•t

      S          tm Sandra                name?

L My nun* Uis.

    S WIo;Luis         are pufi•m?

L rmftun$üL

     S Oh, fm fr«n              rmfrom Madrid

Play the recording again, pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat as a class. Get a couple of pairs of students to practise the conversation in open pairs and then get the class to continue in closed pairs.

SUGGESTION

If you have pictures of famous people of different nationalities, you can use these for further practice. If not, you can write on the board the names of some famous people whose nationalities students will know, for further question and answer practice.


T 2 8

5This exercise consists of three short conversations with people from different countries and it is the students' first unseen listening. They should be well prepared for the language by now, but some students tend to panic without the support of the written word. Explain that they only have to listen for two countries in conversations I and 2, and one country in conversation 3. Tell them not to worry if they don't understand every word!

Play the first conversation and elicit where Akemi is from (Japan). Play the rest Of the recording and let students compare their answers in pairs. Play the recording again as many times as is necessary to let students complete their answers.

SUGGESTION

Allowing students to tell you other details that they have understood from a listening can help build their confidence, so you can ask extra questions within the students' language range, e.g. What's his/her name? Where in (England)?

6 Look at the example with the whole class. Elicit the match for question 2 (Her name's Irena) and then get students to continue working individually before checking their answers in pairs.

T 2.9

Play the recording and let students check their answers.

Check it

7 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Check students understand that the convention of ticking (V) indicates that something is correct. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

I This is the first reading text that the students have encountered in the book. It presents the subject pronoun they. Focus attention on the photo and get students to guess where Miguel and Glenna are from. Get students to read the text through quickly and check (Miguel — Brazil, Glenna — Canada). Check comprehension Of Canada by getting students to locate it on the map on p13.

GRAMMAR SPOT

Focus attention on the gapped sentences. Complete the first sentence with the whole class as an example (is). Then ask students to complete the other sentences.

 Play the recording and ask students to read and listen. Then explain any new words. Words and phrases not previously introduced are married, doctor, hospital, teacher, school, and in the centre of. Married can be explained by referring to a famous married couple. To explain doctor, you can turn to PI 8 of the Student's Book (the start of Unit 3), where there is a picture of a doctor. Ask students Where? about the doctor to elicit/explain hospital. Teacher and school should be easy to explain in the context of the classroom. In the centre Ofcan be illustrated on the board.

Unit

If necessary, highlight the use of he/she/they, by pointing to a male student and saying he, a female student and saying she, a pair of students and a group of students and saying they.

Refer students to Grammar Reference 2.4 on p 121.

word on the board and crossing out the letters.

Get students to say numbers 1—20 round the class. Again get them to repeat as many times as necessary until they can say the numbers without hesitation.

2      Students work in pairs to complete the sentences about the text. Make sure they understand they can give the country or city as the answer to number l. Go over the answers by asking individual students to read out their completed sentences.

Answers

 Miguel is from Brazil/Rio.

2               He's a teacher.

3               His school is in the centre of Rio.

4               Glenna is from Toronto in Canada.

5               She's a doctor.

6               Her hospital is in the centre of Rio.

7               They are in New York.  8 They are married.

3      Focus attention on the questions in the speech bubbles in exercise 3. Highlight the use of the contraction 's. Get students to ask and answer in open pairs. Students then work individually to write questions about Miguel and Glenna, using the prompts. Then get students to write other questions using What ... ? and Where ? Monitor and help as necessary. Students ask and answer in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of he/she and his/her, and for falling intonation on the wh- questions.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 2

Exercises 8 and 9 These provide further reading and sentence completion practice.

Exercise 10 This is an exercise to practise listening for correct information.

Exercise I I In this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

 

Numbers 11-30

1 Get students to say numbers 1—10 round the class, repeating as many times as necessary until students can say them without hesiiation.

T 2.11

2Focus attention on numbers 11—20. Remind students of the system used in the book for highlighting word stress. Play the recording and get students to listen, read, and repeat chorally. Play the recording again and get students to repeat individually. If necessary, remind students that the gh in eighteen is silent by writing the

3     Give students a number dictation. (See Unit I Everyday English Suggestion TB p 12.) Then write a random selection of numbers 1—20 (as figures) on the board and get students to say the numbers first chorally, then individually.

4     Focus attention on the example. Then get students to continue matching in pairs.

T 2.12 Play the recording through once and get students

to check their answers. Play the recording again and get them to repeat, first chorally then individually, Check students can distinguish the word stress on thirteen and thirty:

       thirteen            thirty

Get students to say numbers 1—30 round the class. Get them to repeat as many times as necessary until they can say the numbers without hesitation.

T 2.13

5Focus attention on the panel of numbers in exercise 5. Play the first number as an example and focus on the answer ( 12). play the recording through once and get students to tick the numbers. Let students check their answers in pairs and then play the recording again if necessary. Check the answers with the whole class.

 Answers and tapescript

I twelve

2 sixteen

3 twenty-one

4      seventeen

5      thirty

6      Get students to do a number dictation in pairs using numbers 1—30 (See Unit I Everyday English Suggestion TB p 12). Student A should say the numbers and Student B write. Then get students to change roles. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation and comprehension of the numbers. Note any common errors, and drill and practise the numbers again in the next lesson.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 2

Exercises 12—16 These exercises review and consolidate numbers 11—30.

Don't forget!

Word list

Ask the students to turn to p128 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.

Introduction to the unit

The title of Unit 3 is 'Personal information' and the main aim of the unit is to allow students to exchange more information about themselves. This includes job, age, address, phone number, and whether students are married or not. The grammar of the verb to be is recycled and extended to include the we form, negatives, wh- and Yes/No questions and short answers. In terms of skills, students get practice in listening and speaking, and reading and speaking.

The lexical set of jobs is presented and the Everyday English syllabus is extended to include social expressions.

Language aims

Grammar — am/are/is The verb to be is recycled and extended to include the subject pronoun we in the negative and positive, negative forms 'm not, isn't, questions with question words including How old and Who, Yes/No questions and short answers.

Possessive adjectives My, your, his, and her are reviewed from Units I and 2. Vocabulary A set of common jobs is presented and there is an opportunity to extend this set with students' own jobs.

Everyday English This section focuses on social expressions including greetings at different parts of the day ( Good morning, etc.) and key situational language like Pardon?, Sorry, etc.


Workbook The lexical set of jobs is recycled.

The forms of to be are fully reviewed with exercises on the negative, questions, and short answers.

Students are given extra practice in listening and reading.

There is an exercise on word stress.

The social expressions from Everyday English are reviewed.

Notes on the unit

NOTE

In this section, students are asked to give their own job. If you have a multilingual group or you don't speak the students' own language, ask them to look up the name of their job in a dictionary before the lesson. Brieflv check the pronunciation with the students so that they are prepared for exercise 2.

I This section introduces some job vocabulary and practises the question Vthat's yourjob? Students will already be familiar with doctor and teacher from the Reading in Unit 2, so use these as examples to demonstrate the activity.

If you think students might know some of the jobs, put them in pairs and ask them to match any jobs they know and guess the others. Then check answers with the class. If you think students won't know any of the vocabulary or won't want to guess the answers, then do the matching activity as a whole-class exercise.

3


Answers and tapescript  a teacher

2     a taxi driver

3     a police officer

4     a businessman

5     a doctor

6     a shop assistant

       7 a nurse                      

8 a student

T 3.1 Play the recording and get students to listen and repeat the words, first chorally and then individually. Concentrate on correct pronunciation and word stress. Make sure students don't get confused by the spelling of nurse and businessman and pronounce the u incorrectly:

nurse /na:s/ businessman /'brzmsman/

2 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Write the sentences up on the board and circle the a in each answer to emphasize that we use an article before jobs. Drill the question and answers chorally and individually. Quickly check if students have jobs which are different from those in the Student's Book. If students want to use a job beginning with a vowel, e.g. engineer, point out they will have to use an — I'm an engineer.

Negatives — isn't

1     Briefly review his and herby pointing to a man and a woman in the Starter pictures and eliciting What's his job? and What's herjob? Play the recording, pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students include the article a each time. Students practise talking about the people in the pictures in open and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct intonation and use of his/her and a.

SUGGESTION

If you think students need more practice, you can use flashcards of the same jobs that appear in the Student's Book. Get students to ask and answer What's his/her job? in pairs, swapping the flashcards as they finish with them.

2     Point to the teacher in the Student's Book and say He isn't a student. He's a teacher, Shake your head as you say the negative sentence to make the meaning clear. Point to the doctor and say She isn't a nurse. She's a doctor.

3

 

GRAMMAR SPOT

Focus attention on the negative sentence and what the contracted form is in full. Make sure students understand that the sentence is negative. Ask students to circle the negative forms in exercise 2.

T 3.3

Play the recording, pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students can reproduce the negative form correctly and that they include the article a each time. Write the following cues on the board to demonstrate the activity:

Number 2 He / shop assistant X / taxi driver

Number 3 She / teacher X / police officer

Get students to give the above sentences in full (He isn't a shop assistant. He's a taxi driver and She isn't a teacher. She's a police officer.). Students then continue talking about the pictures in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct intonation, pronunciation of isn't, and use of a.

SUGGESTION

If you think students need more practice with is/isn't, you can get them to produce sentences with information about each other. You can talk about jobs and also review the language from Unit 2, e.g.

Ana isn't a student. She's a teacher.

Juan isn't a teacher. He's a doctor.

Yoshi isn'tfrom Tokyo. He's from Osaka. Her name isn't Helen. It's Elena.

 

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 3

Exercises 1—3 These exercises review jobs, the questions What's his/her job?, and is/isn't.

Questions and short answers

3     Focus attention on the website file details. Read through the information with the class. Check comprehension of address, phone number, and age and drill the pronunciation of these words. Remind students of married from the Reading in Unit 2.

4     Focus attention on the example in number l. Put students into pairs to complete the questions and answers. Note that students will have to generate the question Where's she from? for the Country category on the website file. This question should not be a problem for them, as they have already practised it several times. The question How old is she? is also new and is given in full so that students can familiarize themselves with it before they practise it. The short answer No, she isn't is included in this exercise. Again, students will be able to generate the question (Is she married?) for this answer, and Yes/No questions and short answers are covered in the following exercise. (With a weaker group, you could complete the questions and answers with the whole class first and use the 'Listen and check' phase for repetition.)

T 3.4

Play the recording, pausing after each question and answer and get students to check their answers.

Answers and tapescript  I Whaes her rume? Amy Roberts.

2     Where she from? England.

3     Whatsher address? 18, Market Street, Manchester• 4 What her phone mnnber? 0161 929 5837.

 S How old is she? Shds 6 Whaesberjob? Shdsa student. 7 Is she No, she isnt.

Play the recording again and get students to repeat all the questions and answers. Do this chorally and individually. Point out that in English we give our phone numbers using single figures 0—9, and that 0 is pronounced soh'. Get students to ask and answer about Amy, working in open and then closed pairs.

SUGGESTION

For further practice, cut out a picture of a man from a magazine (or draw one on the board) and provide similar ID information about him. Students then practise asking and answering the questions with he/him.

GRAMMAR SPOT

Focus attention on the questions and short answers. Make sure students understand that we don't repeat the key word from the question in the short answer. Ask students to circle the short answer in exercise 4.

5 Yes/No questions and short answers, which appeared in exercise 4, are covered in full here.

Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Ask students to read and listen. Play the recording through once. Play the recording again, pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat as a class. Check for accurate reproduction of the rising intonation on the question and falling intonation on the answer:

Is Amy from America? No, she isn't,

Focus on the question cues in number I and demonstrate the first q uestion and answer exchange with a confident student — Is she from London? No, she isn't. Students continue to ask and answer about the other cities in question l, working in open pairs. Students continue asking and answering the other questions in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct intonation and correct use of short answers.

Answers

I Is she from London? No, she isnt. Is she from Liverpool?               No, she isn't. Is she from Manchester? Yes, she is.        

2 Is she 16?    Not she isnt Is she 18?       No, she isn't.

            Isshe20?                    Yes, she is.

 Is she a teacher? No, she isn't. Is she a nurse? No, she isn't. Is she a student? Yes, she is.

     4 Is she married?             No, she isn't,

6 This exercise practises the positive and negative forms in sentences. Focus attention on the two examples in number I. Students complete the sentences with the information about Amy. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

2      Herphone numberisn't0171 929 5837. It's 0161 929 5837.

3      Sheisn't 18. Shek20. 4 She isn't married. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 3

Exercise 4 An identity card exercise to practise personal information,

Exercise 5 A third person question formation exercise.

Exercise 6 An exercise to practise third person short answers.

WHAT'S YOUR JOB?

Negatives and short answers

I      Yes/No questions in the second person and short answers in the first person are presented here. Focus attention on the information about Jeff. Give students time to read it through.

T 3.6

Play the recording through once and ask students just to listen. Play the recording again and get students to complete as many questions and answers as they can while they listen. Get them to compare their answers in pairs and help each other to complete the conversation, using the information about Jeff.

Play the recording again and get students to check their answers and/or complete any they missed. Check the answers with the whole class.

Answers and tapeseript A Is your name Jeff?

J      Yes, it is.

*         A Are you from England, Jeff?    

 J No, I'm not from England. I'm from Houston, Texas.         

*         A Areyoua police officer?

J Yes, lam.

 A Are you 23?

J No, I'm not. I'm 25.

 A Are you married? J Yes, I am.

I Focus attention on the negative sentence and what the contracted form is in full. Make sure students understand that the sentence is negative. Ask students to circle the negative forms in exercise I.

2 Focus attention on the short answers. Make sure students understand that we use the full form in the third person affirmative — Yes, it is, not *it's, and that we cannot say I * amn't for the first person negative. Ask students to circle the short answers in exercise l. Read Grammar Reference 3.1 on p122 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it.

2      This is a 'Listen and answer' exercise where students reply to your questions. Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Ask the question to a number of students and elicit true short answers Yes, I am or No, I'm not, Drill the pronunciation of the short answers. Then ask the students further questions to generate a range of true short answers. These can include:

Name: Are you (Yoshi)?

Country: Are you from (Spain)?

City: Are you from (Rio)?

Job: Are you a (teacher)?

Age: Are you (28)?

Married; Are you married?

3      In this exercise students mingle and ask each other Yes/No questions. Focus attention on the speech bubbles and get students to ask and answer in open pairs. It's a good idea to give students time to prepare their questions before they mingle, especially with a weaker group. Get students to write five questions using the questions in the book as a model and substituting information where possible.

Get students to stand up and do the activity. Monitor and check for correct intonation and use of short answers.

3

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 3 Exercise 7 This exercise provides practice of first person short answers.

Exercise 8 A second person question formation exercise.

Exercise 9 This exercise provides practice of first person answers to questions with question words.

Listening and speaking

1 Focus attention on the photos of Giovanni and Diana. Get students to read through the information in the table so that they know what they have to listen for. Explain that they are going to hear two conversations, one with Giovanni and one with Diana. These are a little longer than in previous units, but reassure students that they only need to complete the information in the table and they don't have to understand every word.

T 3.7

Ask students to listen for the country Giovanni is from. Check the answer ( Italy). Play the first eight lines of conversation I and then pause. Play the recording again from the beginning and get students to complete the information about Giovanni. Pause before moving on to conversation 2.

Play conversation 2 through once and get students to complete the information about Diana. Get students to compare their answers in pairs. Play the conversations again, pausing after conversation I and get students to complete/check their answers.

Check the answers with the whole class.

Giovanni Tomba  Diana Black the United StatE

City/Town

Rome

New York

Phone number

069448139

212 463 9145

Age

23              

29        

 

Taxi driver

No        

Shop assistant

I I Good morning.

G Hello.

 I Wha€s your name, please?

G My names Giovanni Tomba.

I Thank you. And where are you from, Giovami?

G rm from Rome, in Italy.

I Thank you. And your telephone number, please?

G 06 944 8139.

I How old are you, Giovanni?

G tm twenty-three.

I And... whaesyourjob?

G rmataxi driver.

 And are you married?

t Ah! So youfrefrom the United States.

D Yes, lam.

 I What's your phone number?

D 2124639145.

I Thank you. How old are you?

D rm twenty-nine.

I Whatsyour job, Miss Black?

D rm a shop assistant.

I And are you married?

          D Yes, I arn        

I Thaesfine.Thankyou very much.

2 Demonstrate the activity by asking a confident student the first question. Students continue asking and answering in closed pairs. Monitor and check. If students have problems with intonation or with the short answers, drill the questions and answers across the class and get students to repeat.

Check the answers with the whole class.

*    No, he isnt Yes, she is.

*    No, imt. No, she ism. Yes, it is.             Yes, she is,

SUGGESTION

If students need further practice, get them to ask and answer more Yes/No questions with the information about Giovanni and Diana, e.g.

Is Giovanni from Italy? Is Diana from Chicago?

Is he a teacher?

Is he 23?

Is her phone number 212 463 9145?

Is she a shop assistant?

Is he married?

Is she married?

Talking about you

3      Focus attention on the example. Tell students they need a question word, e.g. Where, What, in all the questions except number 6. Get students to complete the questions in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class.

Answers

1      Whaesyour name?

2      Where are you from?

3      Whaesyour phone number?

4      How old are you?

5      Whaesyour job?

6      Are you married?

Check the pronunciation of-the questions. Make sure students know to use falling intonation on the Whquestions and rising intonation on the Yes/No question (number 6). Divide the class into groups of three and get students to interview each other, using the questions. Get students to write down information about one student to use in exercise 4.

4      Get students to use the information they found in exercise 3 to write a short description. This can be done in class time or for homework.

SUGGESTION

If vou want to give students further practice in exchanging personal information, photocopy the role cards on TB p107. There are four cards for female students and four for male students, so photocopy the appropriate number of cards for the gender balance in your class.

Give out the role cards to the students, telling them this is their new identity. If necessary, review the questions students will need before they start the pairwork. Divide the class into pairs and get them to ask and answer the questions and note down the answers. Pair

students with a different partner and get students to describe their first partner in order to review he/she, his/her.

If you want students to have more written practice, get them to use the information to write a description as in exercise 4 above.

Check it

5 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Remind students of the convention of ticking (V) to indicate that something is correct. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers

I Her name's Janelle.

2    Shes a teacher.

3    Are you from Spain?

4    His phone number is 796542.


5    HOW Old is she?

6    She isn't married.

7    Are you married? Yes, I am.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL                                                   

Workbook Unit 3

Exercise 13 This provides further listening practice.

Exercise 14 This provides further practice Of third person short answers.

READING AND SPEAKING                                                                             G       No, no. We arent from the United States. We're from

A pop groupEngland. Sorry. How old are you both? CI'm 21 and George is 20. I Check comprehension of the title 'A pop group' by      Y         And I'm 19.

asking students to give names of groups they know.Thanks. Now, who's married in 4 x 4? Focus attention on the photo and make sure studentsWell, I'm not married.

understand that it shows a pop group called 4 x 4 (saidC and G We aren't married! 'four by four'). Pre-teach/check on tour, great, and who?  I Melanie, are you married? The text also introduces the subject pronoun we and the M Yes, lam!

preposition at. Students should understand these from          I • Well, thank you, 4 x 4 Welcome to New York! context, but be prepared to explain if necessary.         All It's great here. Thanks! Ask students to read the text through fairly quickly.

GRAMMAR SPOT

Check students understand we by gesturing to yourself and another student. Focus attention on the affirmative sentence and the contracted form We're. Make sure students understand what the contracted form is in full. Ask students to circle the examples of we're in the reading text.

Focus attention on the negative sentence and the contracted form aren't. Make sure students understand what the contracted form is in full and that the sentence is negative. Ask students to circle the examples of aren't in the reading text.

Refer students to Grammar Reference 3.2 on p 122.

T 3.8

Play the first eight lines of the conversation and elicit the

 

 

answer to question I (Melanie is 22). Play the rest of the

4

Tell students they are going to invent a pop group. Focus

conversation and get students to listen for the answers to

 

attention on the questions in exercise 4. Check students

2 and 3. If necessary, refer them back to the text so that

 

understand Where are you now? by asking the same

they can remember the names of the characters.

 

question about the classroom situation. Divide the class

Play the recording through again and get students to

 

into groups of four. Try to get a mixture of males and

check/complete their answers.

 

females in each group. Give students time to invent their

Check the answers with the whole class.

 

imaginary identities and write down the details.

Demonstrate the questions and answers with a confident

2 Elicit the answer to number 1 (is 4 x 4). Students complete the rest of the sentences, working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class.




Answers       

      I The name of the group is 4 x 4.              

2    Melanie Ryan is from Australia.

3    Cathand George Walters are from England.

4    Yves Lacosteis from France.

5    'Wúe on tourin the United States.'

3Get students to read the questions through before they listen. If necessary, review numbers 11—30 to help students when picking out the ages of the characters.

Answersgroup. For the answer to What are your names?

           I Melanie is 22. encourage students to use I'm   and This is . . . to avoid  2 Cathis21andGeorgeis20.      the need for our, which is presented in Unit 4.

 3 Yvesis19.

Then get the groups to ask and answer about their pop

 4 Melanie is married. Yves, Cath,and George arentmarried.                      groups. Monitor and check. Get one or two groups to describe themselves to the rest of the class.

3


ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 3

Exercise 15 This provides further reading practice.

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

Social expressions

I Focus attention on the gapped conversations and the expressions in the box. Focus attention on conversation I and elicit the second part of the answer (Good morning, Mr Brown.) Students continue completing the conversations in pairs, using the pictures to help.

and tapescript

Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Students then practise the conversations in open and then in closed pairs.

NOTE

Exercise 2 contains examples of the Present Simple (I don't know and I don't understand). At this stage, it's best to treat these as useful expressions rather than explain the grammar behind the use of Present Simple. This will be covered in Units 5 and 6.

T 3.10

2Focus attention on the first photo and on the gapped conversation. Play the first conversation on tape as an example and elicit the answer (I don't know). Play the rest of the recording, pausing at the end of each conversation. Students complete their answers using the words given.

If necessary, play the recording again to allow students to check/complete their answers before checking with the whole class.

Answers and tapescript

I A Whaes this in English?

B I don't know.

A It's a dictionary.

2    C Hogyhívnak?

M I don't understand. Sorry.

C Wha€s your name?

 M My name's Manuel. I'm from Spain.

3    A Thehomeworkisonpage.:.oftheWorkbook. B Pardon?

is on page thirtyofthe Workbook.

3 If necessary, play the recording again and get the students to repeat. Students then practise the conversations in open and closed pairs.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 3

Exercises 16—18 These exercises review and consolidate the social expressions from the Everyday English section.

Don't forget!

Workbook Unit 3

Exercise 10 In this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

Exercises 11 and 12 Word stress exercises.

Word list

Ask the students to turn to p 129 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson. Stop and check I for Units 1—3 (TB PI 30).


Introduction to the unit

The title of this unit is 'Family and friends' and it aims to extend the range of personal information students can give. The unit introduces the possessive 's with family vocabulary, has/have, and irregular plurals. Students get practice in all four skills with listening and speaking tasks, reading texts on family and friends, and a guided writing task. The lexical set of family is presented and another important communicative tool — the alphabet — is introduced in Everyday English. This section also covers phone language.

our/their • Possessive 's Family relations • has/have

The alphabet • On the phone

Language aims

Grammar — possessive The possessive 's is introduced via the context of family. The way Of expressing possession in English is different from many other languages and so students may initially have problems with this. Students are given lots of controlled practice in the Student's Book and Workbook, and the Grammar spot highlights possible confusion with 's as a contraction of is. has/have Has/have are introduced in the affirmative. We introduce have rather than have got, as have can generate a broader range of uses, e.g. I have three children (possession), and I have lunch at 12 (have as main verb). Have got operates differently and may cause confusion when students meet the Present Simple and have to deal with do/does forms. This is avoided in New Headway Beginner as the Present Simple is introduced in Unit 5 after students have practised has/have in the affirmative. Apart from in the third person singular affirmative, have will operate like all the other verbs presented in the Present Simple and so students won't be overloaded by new language. Have got is covered in New Headway Elementary.

Irregular plurals These are introduced as part of the presentation on families and are covered in Grammar Reference 4.3.

Possessive adjectives Out and their are introduced in this unit, and there is a review of all possessive adjectives and subject pronouns.

Vocabulary The lexical set of the family is introduced and practised and there is also a focus on the language of describing a friend. Basic adjective + noun combinations are introduced via the reading texts, e.g. a good job.

Everyday English The alphåbet is introduced and practised and there is also a focus on phone language.

Workbook The lexical set of the family is recycled.

Possessive 's is consolidated. There are exercises to help with potential confusion between both the possessive 's and the contracted form of is, and plurals.

Possessive adjectives and subject pronouns are consolidated.

Has/have are reviewed and consolidated.

There is a vocabulary categorizing exercise to review vocabulary from Units

Students are given extra practice in listening and reading.

There are exercises on word stress.

The alphabet and phone language from Everyday English are reviewed.

Notes on the unit

1     T 4.1 This section reviews all the possessive adjectives students have seen in Units 1—3 and also presents our and their. Focus students' attention on the subject pronoun column and briefly review I, you, etc. by pointing to yourself and students and eliciting the correct pronoun, Focus attention on the examples in the table. Get students to continue completing the table, working in pairs. Play the recording and let students check their answers. Play it again and get students to repeat chorally and individually, Make sure they can distinguish you/you, they/their, and that they can pronounce our correctly.

Answers and tapeseript

     "jectpronout        I          you he she we they

Possesiveadjeetive my your his her our their

2     Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Say the sentences, pointing to relevant objects and getting students to repeat. Elicit more examples by pointing to objects that belong to the students and objects in the classroom.

SALLY'S FAMILY

Possessive ' s — family relations

I Focus attention on the photographs.

T 4.2

Play the recording and ask students to follow the text in their books. Check comprehension of husband, bank manager, children, and college.

GRAMMAR SPOT

I Focus attention on the examples. Make sure that students understand that 's is the contracted form of is.

2      Review the use of her and then focus attention on the use of possessive 's. Make sure that students understand that we use this form to express possession.

3      Review the use of his and then focus attention on the other examples with possessive 's. Ask students to circle the examples of possessive 's in the text about

Sally. Make sure students don't confuse the contracted form of is with possessive 's.

Point to one member of the family and ask Who's this? to elicit the person's name. Take the opportunity to further practise How old is . ? and (I think) She's by asking How old is (Sally)?, etc. to elicit possible ages.

Read Grammar Reference 4.1 and 4.2 on p123 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. Grammar Reference 4.3 on pl 23 focuses on irregular plurals. Read it together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Ask students to find an irregular plural in the text about Sally on p24 (children).

2 Elicit the answers to questions I and 2 ( Yes, she is, and It's in London.). Get students to continue answering the questions in pairs.

Answers and tapescript I Is Sally married?

Yes, she is.

2 Where's their house?

Ys in London.

 What is Sally's job?

She's a teacher.

4 Where's her school?

It's the centre of town. 5 What is Tom's job? a bank manager. 6 Where is his bank?

Ys in the centre of town.

 Are their children doctors?

No, they aren't. Theyre students.

T 4.3

Play the recording and get students to check their answers.

T 4.4

3Focus attention on the words in the table. Play the recording and get students to repeat as a class.

T 4.5

4Focus attention on the family tree. Ask Who's Sally? and get students to point to the correct person in the photo. Now focus attention on the example and play sentence I on the tape, Continue playing the sentences, pausing at the end of each one and getting students to write the correct words, Play the recording again and get students to check their answers.

and tapescript I Sally is Tom's Wife.

2                Tom is Sallfs husband.

3                Kirsty is Sally and Tomk daughter 4 Nick is their son. 5 Sally is NicWs mother.

6 Tom is Kirstfsfather 7 Kirsty is Nicks sister.

8     Nick is Kirstys brother.

9     Sally and Tom are Kirsty and Nick's parents.

10 Kirsty and Nick are Tom and Sally's children.

Play the recording through again, pausing after each sentence and getting students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure they reproduce the possessive 's accurately.

Answers

SUGGESTION

With a weaker group, use the family tree in a teacherlead presentation, e.g. point to Sally and then to Tom and say wife. Sally is Tom's wife. Have students repeat the word in isolation first, then the whole sentence chorally and individually. Make sure that they pronounce the possessive 's. Students can then listen to the recording and write the words down as reinforcement.

5 Write the following on the board to reinforce the use of possessive 's. Whos Nick? 's = is

He's Kirstys brother 's = possessive, not is

Drill the question and answers in open pairs. Then drill a plural example, e.g. Who are Tom and Sally? They're Nick's parents. Get students to continue asking and answering about Sally's family in open pairs. Make sure that they give all possible answers about the different relationships and that they include plural examples, too.

Students continue asking and answering in pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of possessive 's and is/are.

SUGGESTION

You can give students further practice on families and possessive 's by referring to famous people. Draw the family tree of a famous family, e.g. the British or

Spanish royal family and get students to ask and answer questions with Who? Alternatively; you can prepare true/false statements about the family relationships. You can also try a quiz based on famous peoplePrepare questions based on relationships that your students will know. You can include film stars, pop stars, politicians, and sportspeople, e.g.

Who's Victoria Beckham? (She's David Beckham's wife,)

Who's Guy Ritchie? ( He's Madonna's husband.) Who's Kiefer Sutherland? ( He's Donald Sutherland's son.) Who's Stella McCartney? (She's Paul McCartney's daughter.)

Be prepared to modify the questions to suit the age and experience of individual groups.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 4

Exercises 1 and 2 Further. practice of family vocabulary.

PRACTICE (SB

The family

I Focus attention on the photo of Rachel ChangÏs family and on the names. Ask some general questions about the family: Where are they from? What are their names? Focus attention on the table and make sure students understand what information they have to listen for by eliciting possible answers for each category, e.g. name — Bob, age— 16, job — student.

T 4.6

Play the first part of the recording as far as He's a student at college. Elicit the answers about Rachel's brother (Steve, 15, student). Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete the table.

Check the answers with the whole class.

 Age

        Rachelk brother Steve             15

        Rachelk mother Grace             42

       Rachersfather                             44

T 4.6

Hello! My name Rachel, and I'm from the United States. This is a photo of my family. Our house is in San Diego. This is my brother: His name is Steve, and hek 15. a student. This is  my mother. Her nameg Grace. She's forty-two, and shega doctor. And this man is my father, Bob. Heg forty-four, and a businessman.

As a follow-up, point to each of Rachel's relations and get students to give a brief description, e.g. This is Steve. He's Rachel's brother. He's 15 and he's a student.

2      Focus attention on the example and then get students to complete the sentences in pairs.

Check the answers with the whole class, making sure students have included possessive 's where necessary.

2         Her mothe* name is Grace.

3         Grace is            wife.

4         'Whats job?'          a businessman.'

5         'Wher€sthùhouse?' 'It's in San Diego.'

3      Demonstrate the activity by writing the names of your own family on the board and talking about them. Give the inforrnation quite slowly but naturally and then ask a few questions to check understanding, e.g. Who's this?, What's herjob?, etc.

 

SUGGESTION

If possible, it's a nice idea to base family descriptions on real photos. Bring in photos of your family and ask students to do the same. If you have a small enough class, sit them around you and talk about the pictures

slowly but naturally and pass them around. Encourage students to ask questions, following the models in exercise 3 on p26.

Get students to draw their own family tree (and have their family photos ready if relevant). Divide the class into pairs and get students to ask about each other's family. Monitor and check for correct use of he/she, his/her, and a + job.

Ask a few students to choose someone in a family tree or in a photo and give a brief description of him/her, The person can be from their own or their partner's family.

2 Elicit the answer to sentence I with the whole class as an example (true). Then get students to complete the exercise working alone.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

                                                                                                                                  Answers                                           

                                                   1 v' 2 V 3 x 4 x 5 8 6 *              

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 4

Exercise 3 Further practice of possessive 's.

Exercises 4 and 5 Exercises to help with potential confusion between possessive 's and the contracted form of is, and possessive 's, the contracted form of is, and plural -s.

my/our/your.

4      This section consolidates the possessive adjectives covered in the Starter section. Focus attention on the example and then get students to complete the sentences. Ask students

to check in pairs before checking with the whole class.

2         'Whatare                names? 'Our names are Kirsty and Nick.'

3         Jean-Paul and André are students. Their school is in Paris.

4         'My sisteðs married.' Whaes her husbands name?' 5 'My brothedsofficeis in New York.' his job?' 6 We are in our English class.

7 'Ml-an and Dad are in Rome.' 'What tfEir phone number?'

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 4

Exercises 6 and 7 Further practice of possessive adjectives.

has/have

I This section recycles the family vocabulary, possessive 's, and possessive adjectives, and also presents has/have, Point to the picture of Sally on p24 and ask Who's this? Elicit the answer It's Sally Milton. Tell students they are going to read about Sally's brother.

T 4.7

Focus attention on the photograph Of David and his family and play the first line of the recording as an introduction. Play the rest of the recording through to the end. Check comprehension of farm and dogs by pointing to the photo, and check students understand that child is the singular of children.

GRAMMAR SPOT

Focus attention on the table and the examples. Students complete the table with the other forms of have.

You have

He has

She has

 We have

They have

Ask students to circle the examples of has and have in the reading text. Refer students to Grammar Reference 4.4 on p123.

T 4.8

3This is a dictation activity. Each sentence is recorded twice, once at normal speed and once more with time for students to write. Demonstrate the activity by playing the first sentence and getting students to listen only, then play it again and get them to write it down. Tell students there are seven sentences in total. Play the rest of the sentences in the same way. Write the sentences on the board and get students to check their answers.

Answers and tapescript I Ihavea small farm in Wales.

2    My wife a job in town.

3    We have one son.

4    We have two dogs.

5    My sister and her husband have a house in London.

6    He hasaverygoodjob.

7    They have a son and a daughter.

Play the recording again, pausing at the end of each sentence and getting the students to repeat as a class. Students then repeat the lines individually.

4 In this exercise students write about themselves. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Write a few more examples about yourself on the board and list the categories students can write about: brothers/sisters, children, home, job, animals. Go round helping and checking.

4

Then ask a few students to tell the rest of the class about themselves and their family.

PRACTICE (SB p28) has/have

1     Focus attention on the example. Students then complete the exercise working alone.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers

 2 My parents have a house in the country.

 My wife has a Japanese car. 4 My sister and I have a dog.

5    Youhavea very nice family.

6    Our school has fifteen classrooms.

7    We have English classes in the evening,

2     Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Drill the sentences chorally and individually. List the categories students can talk about on the board: number of teachers/students/classrooms; size of school; equipment at your school (e.g. TV, video, CD player, computer. You will need to modify the examples to include equipment that students know you have at your school so that they only generate affirmative sentences.) Divide the class into pairs and get students to talk about their school. Monitor and check for correct use of has/have.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 4

Exercises 12 and 13 Further practice of has and have.

Questions and answers

3     This exercise reviews the question words students have covered to date and also includes a Yes/No question. Focus attention on the example and then get students to match the other questions and answers.

T 4.9

Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Then let them practise the questions and answers in pairs.

Answers and tapescript 1 How is your mother?

She's very well, thank you.

2 Whaes your siste/s job?

She's a nurse.

3 How old are your brothers?

Thefre ten and thirteen.

4     Who is Sally?

 Shes Davids sister.

5     Where is your office?

 in the centre of town.

6     Areyouand your husband from Italy? Yes, we are.

Check it

4 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Remind students of the conven tion of ticking (V) to indicate that something is correct. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers

 I Maryschildren are married.

2    Whatsyour daughters name?

3    Whaeshisjob?

4    Theyre from Germany.

5    Their parents have a house in Bonn.

6    My brother has a good job.

7    Our house is in the centre of town.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 4

Exercise 8 This provides further listening practice.

Exercise 9 A vocabulary categorizing exercise that reviews lexis from Units 1—4.

Exercise 10 and I I Word stress exercises.

Exercise 14 In this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

READING AND WRITING

p28)

My best friend

NOTE

Students need access to dictionaries to check new lexis in the reading text. If students don't usually bring dictionaries to class or if there isn't a class set of dictionaries available, ask students to check the new words (in bold) in the text for homework before the reading lesson.

I Working alone or in pairs, students read the text and check the new words (in bold in the text), (If students have done the dictionary work for homework before the lesson, ask them to do the reading and matching straightaway. )

2      Demonstrate the activity by eliciting the photo that goes with paragraph a (photo I). Students continue to match the other photos and paragraphs, and say who they think the people in the photos are. Check the answers with the whole class.

Photo I — paragraph a (Andy and Carrie) Thoto 2 — paragraph d hotO 3 — paragraph c (Andfs sisters, Alison and Molly) hotO 4 — paragraph b (AndYs parents)

3      Focus attention on the example sentence. Students complete the activity working individually and then check their answers in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class.

1 a student, nice, funny

     2 two sisters, a girlfriend, a lot of CDs              

3    Andy's girlfriend, American, beautiful             

4    a flat, three children

5    a fan of Mood a fan of Manchester United

4      Focus attention on the speech bubble and then get students to give more information about Andy. Divide the class into pairs and get students to take it in turns to talk about Andy, using the information they underlined In exercise 3. Monitor and check for correct use Of he/she/they, his/her/their, is/are, has/have, and possessive 's.

5      Prepare students for the writing phase by eliciting what sort of information can complete each sentence. If you have time, build up a connected description on the board of an imaginary person to provide the students with a model. Get the students to write their description in class or for homework.

SUGGESTION

It's a good idea to let students look at each other's written work to help correct it. When you correct the work, make a note of the most common mistakes in recent target language and get students to correct them as a class activity before you hand back individual work.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 4

Exercise 15 A short reading providing further practice Of family vocabulary, possessive 's, and have.

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

The alphabet

This section covers the alphabet and spelling. Once students have learnt the alphabet, take the opportunity whenever possible to spell new words to the students and to get them to spell words in class.

T 4.10

1Tell the students they are going to practise the alphabet in English. Play the recording, pausing after each letter and getting the students to repeat as a class.

Review the letters that students find confusing and drill these thoroughly:

2 The letters in this exercise are arranged according to sound. Demonstrate this by reading the first group of letters /eW. Say these letters again and get students to repeat as a class. Repeat for the other groups of letters and then get individual students to read different letter groups aloud.

Write different letters on the board at random and elicit them from the students. Pay special attention to the vowels as these often give problems, Then put some

known words on the board and elicit the spelling. (You could feed in How do you spell        ? at this point.)

T 4.11

3Check comprehension offirst name and surname and tell students they are going to hear five people spelling their names. Play the recording of the first name as an example. Then play the other names, pausing at the end of each surname. Students write the names and then check their answers in pairs. Then check the answers with the whole class by writing the names on the board and getting students to spell them aloud.

Answers and tapescript

What's your name? Sally Milton.

How do you spell your first name? S-A-L-L-Y.

How do you spell your surname? M-I-L-T-O-N. What's your name? Javier Ruiz.

How do you spell your first name? J-A-V-I-E-R.

How do you spelt your surname? R-U-I-Z.

What's your name? Quentin Wexham How do you spell your first narTE? Q-U-E-N-T-I-N

How do you spell your surnarTE? W-E-X-H-A-M. Whats your name? Sumiko

How do you spell your first rwne? S-U-M-I-K-O.

     How do you spell your               M-A-T-S-U-D-A.

What's your name? Fabien Lecterc.

     How do you spell               first name? F-A-B-I-E-N.

How do you spell your surname? L-E-C-L-E-R-C.

4     Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles and drill the exchanges chorally and individually. Students practise spelling their own names in open and closed pairs.

4

5     Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles in exercise 5. Drill the exchange chorally and individually. Students practise the exchange with different words from the text, working in open pairs. Students continue working in closed pairs. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation of the letters.

6     Focus attention on the example. Students continue with the other countries. Get them to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Get the students to give the spelling of each country, rather than just the name.

Answers

        I France              3 Brazil

        2 Spain •           4 Japan

SUGGESTIONS

I You can use anagrams such as the ones in exercise 6 to review vocabulary at any stage. Write the jumbled letters on the board and ask students to work out the word in pairs or teams. Always get the class to give the spelling letter by letter to review the alphabet as often as possible.

2 This is a spelling game called Hangman. You can use it at the beginning of lessons as a 'warmer' or as a 'filler' to revise vocabulary. You can divide students into two or three teams for this, or play as a class.

4

5

8

3

 

11

10

1

Choose a word and indicate on the board the number of letters it has, using a dash for each letter (i.e. if your word is doctor, write _ ). One team/The class suggests a letter. If the letter appears in your word, write it in the correct place on the dashes, as many times as it appears (i.e. if the letter suggested is o, you should write o _ for the word doctor). If the letter doesn't appear in your word, write the letter in that team's column at the side of the board with a line through it, and draw one line of the gallows. Then the second team suggests a letter, and so on.

If you are playing in teams, the winning team is the one that guesses the final letter to complete the word or that guesses the whole word at an earlier point. If you complete the drawing of the gallows before the teams/ the class guess the word, then you win and the teams/ class lose.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 4

Exercises 16 and 17 Further practice of the alphabet and spelling.

On the phone

T 4.12

7Focus attention on the first business card and ask What's his name?, Where's his company?, and What's his phone number?. Play the recording through once and get students to follow in their books. Make sure students understand that And your name is? is a polite way of asking What's your name? over the phone.

Play the recording again, pausing at the end of each line and getting students to repeat chorally and individually, Students practise the conversation in closed pairs. Repeat the above procedure for the second conversation, but use the feminine forms What's her name?, her company?, and Mat's her phone number? about the second business card.

8 Ask students to write their own information on the blank business card. They should include first name, surname, address, and phone number and they can invent a company name if they like.

Get students to practise conversations I and 2 in open pairs, using their own information. Students continue working in closed pairs.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 4

Exercise 18 Further practice of the phone language in the Everyday English section.

Don't forget!

Word list

Ask the students to turn to p 129 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.

Video

A video accompanies New Headway Beginner. It takes the form of six episodes centred around four people sharing a house in Oxford. The first episode can be shown after the end of Unit 4, and subsequent episodes after Units 6, 8, 10,

12, and 14.

Episode I Three plus one

Helen, David, and Matt are looking for a fourth person to share the house. The interviews go rather badly, with a stream of unsuitable applicants, until Jane turns up, and gets the room.

EXTRA IDEAS UNITS 1-4

On TB p 108 there are additional photocopiable activities to review the language from Units 1—4. There is a reading text with tasks, a question formation exercise, and a matching activity on everyday English. You will need to pre-teach/check divorced for exercise I of the Language work section.


Introduction to the unit

This unit introduces the Present Simple with I, you, and they in statement forms. Wh- questions, and Yes/No questions and short answers are also practised. At this point the Present Simple is used with a limited range of verbs so that students can get used to the new tense. Students get skills practice with reading and listening, and listening and speaking tasks.

Sports, food, and drinks vocabulary is introduced in the context Of likes and dislikes. The lexical sets of languages and nationalities are also presented. The Everyday English section extends numbers from 31—100 and also focuses on prices.

Language aims

Grammar — Present Simple I The Present Simple is the most used tense in the English language and it is therefore important to introduce it to beginners in an accessible way. In New Headway Beginner, the tense is presented over two units, starting in this unit with the subjects I, you, and they. The affirmative and negative forms are covered along with wh- and Yes/No questions. The third person singular forms are covered in Unit 6.

 Students have met a/an + job in Unit 3 and this focus is extended to cover a/ati + adjective and noun.


Vocabulary Students practise the lexical sets of sports, food, and drinks in the context of likes and dislikes. Countries are recycled and languages and nationalities are introduced.

Everyday English Numbers 31—100 and prices are introduced and practised.

Workbook The lexical sets Of sports, food, and driñks are recycled.

The Present Simple with I, you, they is further practised along with exercises on question formation.

Languages and nationalities are consolidated in a Vocabulary and pronunciation section.

Students are given extra practice in reading and listening.

Numbers and prices from the Everyday English section are reviewed.

Notes on the unit

STARTER

I Focus attention on the photos. Demonstrate the activity by matching the first word in each category to the appropriate picture (tennis— I, Italian food — 13, tea — 4). Students match as many words as possible, working individuallv or in pairs. Encourage them to guess if they are not sure. Ask them to compare their answers before checking answers with the whole class-

Answers and tapescript

      Sports             Food

      1 temis            13 Italian food

     8 football         Il Chinese food10 coffee

        14 swimming 2 pizza                       12 Coca-Cola

      7 skiing              3 hamburgers            9 beer

                                15 oranges             6 wine

5 ice-cream

5 les my


chorally and individually. Consolidate the vocabulary by holding up the book and pointing to the pictures.

(Alternatively, hold up flash cards if these are available.) Ask What's this?!What are these? and elicit replies about three or four examples. Get students to continue asking and answering in pairs.

2 Write on the board three or four things that you like from exercise I. Tick them and show by your expression that you like them. Get students to tick the things they like in exercise I.

Repeat the above procedure for the negative, crossing the things you donh like and getting students to do the same

THINGS I LIKE

Present Simple — l/you

like and don't like, using the vocabulary from Starter exercise I. Ask students to write down sentences with their likes and dislikes. Then, in pairs, students take it in turns to talk to each other about their likes and dislikes. Ask a few students to read their sentences to the class.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 5

Exercises I and 2 Further practice of food vocabulary and the verb like.

Questions

4 The question form Do you like .. . ? is introduced here. Play the recording a couple of times and let students listen before you ask them to repeat line by line, chorally, and individually. Make sure students can reproduce the pronunciation of do you /dju:/ and the

                     Play the recording and get students to repeat            Demonstrate the activity by giving examples of what you

T 5.1

T 5.2

Focus attention on the examples. Make sure students understand that we do not use like in short answers, i.e. you cannot say *Yes, I like or *No, I don't like.

Again, it is probably best not to explain the function of do at this stage.

Refer students to Grammar Reference 5.1 on p123. Do not focus on Questions with question words at this stage.

Focus attention on the examples. Make sure students understand that don't is the contraction Of do not.

If students ask what do means, you can explain simply (in the students' own language if possible) that it helps to make negatives and questions. However, do not give a detailed grammatical explanation at this stage.

1Focus attention on the speech bubbles and      rising intonation on the Yes/No questions. pictures. Play the recording once or twice before you ask students to repeat. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually.

5 Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles.

T 5.3

 

students to guess what he likes from the lists in Starter

pronunciation and Intonation again if necessary.

 

exercise 1. Play the recording once and get students to

Students continue asking about the other things in

 

check their predictions. Focus on the example and play

Starter exercise I.

 

the first line of the recording again. Play the rest of the

6 Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles.

 

recording and get students to write their answers.

Drill the intonation, making sure students can reproduce

 

Students check in pairs. Then check the answers with the whole class.

the contrastive stress in the second question:

Answers and tapescript                                                      

Well, I like swimming and football — American football. I                                                                                                           

Yes, I do. Do you like tennis?

 

don't like tennis. Mmm yeah, hamburgers and pizza, I like

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

hamburgers and pizza and Italian food, I like Italian food a                                                                                                          

Workbook Unit 5

lot, but not Chinese food — I don't like Chinese food and I

don't like tea, but I like coffee and beer.                                                                                                        

Exercises 3 and 4 Further practice of Present Simple with I/you.

2Focus attention on the photo of Bill and ask                               Get students to ask you the questions, drilling the

3 Drill the example in the speech bubble chorally and individually. Make sure students can reproduce the sentence stress accurately:

I like tennis, but I don't like football.

5 l€smy


Reading and listening

T 5.5

1Here students are introduced to more Present Simple verbs: come from, live, work, eat, drink, play, speak, and want. Have is also recycled from Unit 4. Other new words are waiter, drama, restaurant, language, and actor. The languages/nationalities Italian, English, and French are also introduced in context,

Students read the text and listen to the recording once or twice. Try to get students to understand the new vocabulary in context and get them to refer to the information in the photos for help. Check comprehension of live and work by making sentences about yourself, e.g. I live in (town, country), I work in ( this school), etc. Eat, drink, play, and speak should be understandable from the context, but if students need further help, mime the actions. (It is probably not worth going into the fact that drink is a verb here but a noun on p32.) Students should be able to understand waiter, drama, restaurant, and actor from the photos. If they query language and Italian, English, and French write the

corresponding countries on the board and link them to the languages. You may need to translate want to if students query this. If students query the pronoun it in I don't like it, check they understand what noun it refers back to (beer). (Object pronouns itand them are presented in full in Unit 7.)

Focus attention on the examples. Make sure students understand that we use an before a vowel — a, e, i, 0, and u. Point out that this can be a noun, e.g. an actor, or an adjective, an Italian restaurant.

Refer students to Grammar Reference 5.2 and 5.3 on p123.

T 5.6

2Play the recording, pausing at the end of each question and getting students to repeat chorally and individually.

 Get students to complete Gordon's answers. Then play the recording and check the answers with the whole class,

Answers and tapescript I Yes, I do.

2     No, I don't. I live in London.

3     Yes, I do. I live in a flat near the centre.

4     No, I don't. I work in an Italian restaurant.

5     Yes, I do. I like it a lot.

6     No, I don't. I want to be an actor.

7     No, I don't. I don't like it.

8     I speak French but I don't speak Spanish.

3     Before putting students into pairs, demonstrate by asking individual students the questions from exercise 2. Make sure they answer with information about themselves. Get individual students to ask you the questions and answer with true information. Students continue asking and answering in open pairs. If necessary, drill the pronunciation and intonation Of the questions again before getting students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and chêck for correct use of the Present Simple.

Talking about you

4     This exercise introduces the Present Simple in whquestions. Briefly review the question words where, what, and how many by giving short answers and eliciting the appropriate question word, e.g. a dictionary / an actor — What? Australia / in a hospital — Where?

three sisters / ten books — How manv?

T 5.8

Play the recording, pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat as a class. Students then repeat the questions individually. Make sure students can reproduce the falling intonation on the wh- questions.

Demonstrate the activity by giving the answer to the first question yourself. Get students to write their own answers to each question, using the language in Starter exercise I where appropriate. If students need extra vocabulary, e.g. languages, be prepared to feed these in.

Demonstrate the question and answer phase with a confident student by asking and answering the first two questions. Students continue in open and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for accurate use of the Present Simple.

Roleplay

5 You will need to photocopy the role cards on TB pl 09. There is a male and a female role for Student A and for Student B. These are repeated on the page to cut down on photocopying. Make sure you cut out and copy the appropriate number of cards for the gender balance in your class.

Divide the class into pairs and give each student their card, making sure everyone has the correct role in terms of gender. Focus attention on the table on p35 and elicit the questions students will need to ask:

What's your name? How do you spell it?

Where do you live?

DO you live in a house or a flat?

What's your job?

Where do you work?

How many languages do you speak? What sports do you like?

5 It's my


Drill the questions, making sure students can reproduce falling intonation.

Ask a confident pair of students to demonstrate the activity in open pairs. Students then continue in closed pairs, completing the table in the Student's Book with information about their partner's character. If possible, get students to stand up to do the roleplay as if they were at a party. Students can then compare role cards to check they have the correct information.

Check it

6 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Remind students that the convention of ticking (V) indicates that something is correct. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers

I Do you live in Berlin?

2    Where do you come from?

3    Do you speak French?

     4 1 don't speak French.

 5 'Do you like football?' 'Yes, I do.' 6 'Are you married?' 'No, I'm not.' 7 He's an actor.

VOCABULARY AND PRONUNCIATION

 

 

 

Languages and nationalities

1 Check comprehension of Germany, China, and Portugal by referring students back to the map on p13. Focus attention on the example. Students continue the matching activity, working individually.

T 5.9

Play the recording through once and let students check their answers.

Answers and tapescript

      England                        English

Germany         German  Italy        Italian

Mexico Mexican Brazil  Brazilian

JapanJapanese

 PortugalPortuguese

 China                                Chinese

      France             

     The United States      American

      Spain                            Spanish

2

3

4

5

Remind students of the system used in New Headway to highlight word stress. Play the recording again and get students to repeat the pairs of words as a class. Make sure they can reproduce the change of stress from the country to the nationality/language:

Italy              Italian

Japan            Japanese

Portugal Portuguese

Play the recording through again and get students to repeat individually.

Focus attention on the photos and on the examples in the speech bubbles. Point to the photo of the woman carrying beer and drill the examples chorally and individually. Elicit another pair of examples about different people in the photos. Students continue talking about the people in pairs.

This exercise includes the they form of the Present Simple with the verb speak. Students shouldn't have any difficulty with this form, as it's the same as the I form they have already practised.

Check comprehension of Mexico and Switzerland. Focus attention on the example. Students continue making sentences working individually.

I Play the recording and get students to check their answers.

Answers and tapescript

I In Brazil they speak Portuguese.

2    In Canada they speak English and French.

3    In France they speak French.

4    In Germany they speak German.

5    In Italy they speak Italian.

6    In Japan they speak Japanese.

7    In Mexico they speak Spanish.

8    In Portugal they speak Portuguese.

9    In Spain they speak Spanish.

10 In Switzerland they speak French, German, and Italian. Il In the United States they speak English.       

Drill the question form in the speech bubbles. Then get students to practise a few examples in open pairs.

Students continue in closed pairs, taking it in turns to

ask each other about the countries in exercise 3. Monitor

and check for correct use of the question form and for pronunciation of the countries and languages.

This exercise consolidates the nationalities and also


highlights adjective + noun word order. Focus attention


5         It'smy


on the photos and the example. Students complete the exercise by writing the correct nationalities.


T 5.11

play the recording and get students to check their answers.

Answers and tapescript

6

Refer students to Grammar Reference 5.4 on PI 23.

6         This exercise gives students the opportunity to practise the Present Simple, nationalities, and noun + adjective word order in a personalized way.

Write the verbs have, eat, and drink on the board and elicit adjectives and nouns that can go with each verb,

e.g.

have a/an Japanese/American/German/French car an Italian/American bag a Japanese camera an English dictionary eat          Chinese/ItaIian/Japanese/French food

Spanish oranges

American/ltalian ice-cream drink French/Italian/German/Portuguese/Spanish wine

French/German/English/American beer

Brazilian coffee

Chinese tea

Give examples of your own with have, eat, and drink. Trv to highlight the use of a/an, e.g. I have a Japanese camera. I don't have an Italian car. Then get students to write their own examples. Monitor and help. Check for accurate use of a/an and correct adjective + noun word order.

7 Focus attention on the example questions in the speech bubbles. Give students time to write at least four questions of their own using have, eat, and drink Monitor and help.

Drill the questions and answers in the speech bubbles. Get students to practise in open pairs across the class and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of the Present Simple, a/an and adjective + noun word order.

SUGGESTION

You can bring in adverts from magazines to give students further practice with nationality adjectives and nouns. Select pictures of cars, cameras, computers, TVs, food, and drinks. Elicit simple adjective + noun phrases,

e.g. an American computer, Spanish wine, etc. and then get students to use the pictures to practise Do you have/eat/drink/like... ? and short answers Yes, I do/No, I don't. If pairs of students interview other pairs, you can also practise the they form. (If students try to generate he/she forms, tell them these are different and that they will practise them in Unit 6.)

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 5

Exercise 5 A reading text to practise the Present Simple — they.

Exercise 6, 7, and 8 Exercises to practise wh- questions and answers, and Yes/No questions.

Exercises 13 and 14 Further practice of languages and nationalities.

Exercise 15 Further practice of like and nationality adjectives nouns.

LISTENING AND SPEAKING

At a party

I This is a fairly long, though fairly simple, unseen listening. Set the scene by pointing to Alessandra and Woody in the illustration. Get students to say what nationality they think they are (I think he's/she's ... ).

T 5.12

Play the recording through once and let students check their predictions (Alessandra is Italian and Woody is English.)

Give students time to read the pairs Of sentences 1—6. CheCk pronunciation Of Brighton in number 2 and comprehension Of love in number 5 and very much in number 6. Play the first part Of the recording again, and focus attention on the example. Make sure students understand they have to focus on what Woody says. Play the rest of the recording and get students to select the correct sentence from each pair.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Go over the answers by playing the conversation again and pausing the recording after each correct answer.

1      1 work in London.

2      I live in Brighton.

3      I'm an actor.

4      You speak English very well.

5      I love Italy.

6      I like the food and the wine very much.

                                                                                   5    Ifsmy

 

T 5.12

    A Hello. I'm Alessandra.         

   W Hi, Alessandra. I'm Woody. Woody Bates.

A Do you live here in London, Woody?

W No, I don't. I work in London but I live in Brighton.

*         A Whaesyour job?

W Pm an actor. Whaes your job?

A I work ina hotel.

*         W You aren't English, but you speak English very well. Where do you come from?

A I'm Italian. I come from Verona.

W Oh, I love Italy.  A Really?

W Oh, yes. I like the food and the wine very much.

2        Turn to the tapescript on PI 14 and get students to practise the conversation in pairs.

Roleplay

3        Tell students to imagine they are at a party in London. Explain that they have to invent a new identity. Give an example by copying the role card onto the board and writing the information for your new identity. Ask students to complete the role card with their new details. Demonstrate the activity with a confident student, starting with the language in the speech bubbles. Build up a list of possible questions on the board which students could ask each other.

4        Get the class to stand up and complete the roleplay. Monitor but do not expect perfect accuracy or pronunciation. Make notes of major errors to feed back on later but try not to spoil students' enjoyment of the roleplay. If some pairs do well, you could ask them to act it out in front of the class.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Uilit 5

Exercise 10 Students gap-fill another conversation at a

party.

Exercise I I Further listening practice.

5        Ifs my

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

p39)

Numbers and prices

I Review numbers 1—30 by getting students to count round the class. Repeat until they can say the numbers accurately without hesitation.

T 5.13

2Focus attention on numbers 10—100. Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Get students to count to one hundred in tens round the class.

3 This is a pairs number dictation. See Unit I Suggestion TB p12 for instructions for this task.

T 5.14

4This exercise presents prices under and over one pound in English. Play the recording and let students read and listen. Focus attention on the use of p pi:/ for prices under a pound. Also point out the plural pounds, and that we do not say pounds and p in the same price,

i.e. we do not say * one pound sixty p but one pound sixty. Play the recording again and gets students to repeat chorally and individually.

5      Demonstrate the activity by getting students to say the first two prices aloud. Students then continue saying the prices in closed pairs. Monitor and check students can distinguish the stress on:

seventeen pounds and seventy pounds

T 5.15 Play the recording and get students to check their answers. If students had problems with pronunciation, play the recording again and get them to repeat. (With a weaker group; you could say the prices as a class activity, drilling the pronunciation as you go along, and then play the recording for reinforcement.)

6      This is a discrimination exercise which gets students to distinguish between prices that sound similar. Focus

attention on the objects and prices. (With a weaker group, you could elicit the prices for each object orally first and then get students to listen and tick.)

T 5.16

Play the recording through once and get students to tick the prices they hear. Play it through a second time so that students can check their answers. Get them to check in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers and tapescript I The cheese sandwich is 90p.

2     The football is £14.

3     The camera is £90.99.

4     Thebeeris£160.

5     The chocolate is 60p.

6 The mobile phone is £24.74.

7      The dictionary is £10.75.

8      ThebagisBO.99:


7 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Drill the question and answer chorally and individually. (If students query the use of How much . . . explain that this is the question we use to ask about prices. Do not go into an explanation of the difference between How much/How many at this stage.)

Practise two or three exchanges in open pairs. Then get the students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct numbers and prices.

SUGGESTION

You can give students extra practice with numbers and prices by bringing in adverts, leaflets, and menus that show prices and getting students to practise How much is. .. ? Make sure you select the items carefully so that they show Objects students know (or ones that you can teach that are in the post-beginner range). If you choose images that show plural objects, you will need to pre-teach/check: How much are .

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 5

Exercises 16—19 Consolidation of numbers and prices.

Don't forget!

Workbook Unit 5

Exercise 9 A review of is, are, and do.

Exercise 12 In this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

Word list

Ask the students to turn to p 130 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson. Progress test I for Units 1—5 (TB p 121).

5 It's my


Introduction to the unit

The title of this unit is 'Every day' and it covers the language of daily routines. It presents the third person singular form of the Present Simple and so follows on from the language covered in Unit 5. Basic frequency adverbs, telling the time, and days of the week are also introduced.


The vocabulary syllabus is extended with a focus on an important aspect of English — collocation. The lexical set is of daily routine verbs, allowing students to talk about their own routine and ask about other people's.

6 •

Language aims

The time The unit opens with a section on telling the time in English. This is done with digital time so that students can use the numbers they already know to tell the time, e.g. five fifteen, and not have to worry about quarter to/past, half past, etc.

Grammar — Present Simple 2 The I/you forms are reviewed and the presentation of the Present Simple is completed with he/she/it in the positive, negative, and question forms (both wh- and Yes/No questions). The third person singular form is the one that causes most problems for students and so it is divided out into a section of its own for the initial presentation. All forms of the Present Simple are reviewed and recycled across the course so that students can deal with the differences in the I/you/we/they and he/she/it forms. Frequency adverbs Usually, sometimes, and never are introduced and practised as part of the function of talking about routines.

Vocabulary The vocabulary section focuses on words that go together and so introduces an important aspect of English — collocation. The section includes words that go with common verbs to produce a useful lexical set for talking about routines.

Everyday English Days of the week and prepositions of time are presented and practised.

Workbook The time is reviewed in a range of exercises.

The he/she/it forms of the Present Simple positive are reviewed along with the frequency adverbs from the unit. Students are also given the opportunity to personalize the adverbs and review the I form.

Students practise third person singular Present Simple negative and questions, and also review the use of the auxiliary verbs do/does/don't/doesn'tin all forms.

Vocabulary from the units covered to date is consolidated in a crossword.

Students get skills practice with a listening and a guided writing task

The days of the week and prepositions from Everyday English are reviewed and consolidated.

POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

       The Present Simple has very few inflections when compared with equivalent structures in other languages. The addition of the third person singular -s is the only change in the positive and so students often forget to include it. Be prepared to give lots of practice in the he/she/it forms!

       The use Of does/doesn'tis an added complication which students often confuse with do/don't. Again, regular review and practice will help students produce the forms accurately,

• The third person singular -scan be pronounced in three ways: works    /wxks/ lives      I'llvz] watches / 'wotf1Z/

Students also need help in distinguishing and producing these endings.

Notes on the unit

NOTE

It is useful to have a cardboard clock with movable hands for this lesson and for subsequent revision of telling the time. If you do not have one in your school, then it is quite easy to make one.

The Student's Book presents digital times so that students can tell the time with the numbers they already know, without having to deal with quarter past/to and halfpast. The section includes times on the hour, half hour, and quarter hour. The other times, e.g. (9).05, ( I I ) .25, etc. are covered in a photocopiable task on TB pl 10. See the Suggestion notes opposite.

T 6.1

1Focus attention on the clocks. Play the recording of the first five times, pausing after each one and getting students to repeat chorally and individually. Highlight the use of o'clock for times on the hour and make sure students can pronounce it accurately.

Get students to complete the remaining five times, following the examples given in 1—5. Play the recording of numbers 6—10 and get students to check their answers. Play the recording again, getting students to repeat chorally and individually.

Answers and tapescript

         I Its nine o'clock.                        6 les two o'clock.       

      2 Ys nine thirty.                  7 Its two thirty.

3   les nine forty-five.8 Its two forty-five.

4   les ten o'clock.           9 Its three o'clock. 5 les ten fifteen.       10 les three fifteen.

T 6.2

2Focus attention on the conversation. Play the recording once and get students to listen and read. Play the recording again, and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Demonstrate the pairwork with one student. Ask students to give two or three more examples in open pairs before continuing in closed pairs.

SUGGESTION

There is a photocopiable information gap activity on TB pl 10 which reviews and extends the language of telling the time. Photocopy enough pages for your class (Student A's material and Student B's material are on the same page.) The activity covers times which students haven't met in the Student's Book so you will need to pre-teach/check these first. Write the following times on the board:

11.05, 1.10, 7.20, 9.25, 8.40, 6.50, 12.55

Remind students of the use of 'oh' /ao/, which they met in phone numbers, for 11.05. Get students to say the times aloud, reading them as digital times, e.g. one ten.

Explain that each student has six times and six empty clocks and that they have to ask What time is it, please? and complete the clocks. Demonstrate the activity with one student before dividing the class into pairs and getting them to complete the task. Monitor and check for the correct use of the times.

Students check their answers by comparing their completed sheets.

WHAT TIME DO YOU     ?

p41)

Present Simple — l/you

I This section presents daily routine verbs. Focus attention on the pictures. Elicit some basic information about the character: What's her name? (Lena). How old is she, do you think? (She's about 16.)

Explain that students are going to hear Lena talking about her school day. Review telling the time by getting students to read the pairs of times aloud. (The Starter section didn't present (8) .40, which appears in number 3, but students should be able to read the time as they

already know the numbers.)

T 6.3

Focus on the example and play the first line of the recording. Play the recording to the end and get students to continue circling the correct times. Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again and get students to check against the tape.

Check the answers with the whole class.

Well, on schooldays I get up at seven forty-five. I have     breakfast at eight and I go to school at eight thirty. I have

lunch in school with my friends, thaes at twelve fifteen — Ys early in our school. I leave school at three thirty in the afternoon and I walk home with my friends. I get home at four thirty. I go to bed at eleven o'clock on school days, but not at the weekend.

Say the sentences aloud or play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students aren't confused by the spelling of breakfast and pronounce it correctly /'brekfast/. Students practise the sentences in closed pairs.

2      Demonstrate the activity by telling students about your day, giving the same information as in the pictures. Do this in a natural way, but do not add in any new language. Focus attention on the example in the speech bubble and elicit a few single sentences from students about their day with the verbs from exercise 1. Students continue talking about their day working in pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of the Present Simple and the times.

3      This exercise practises the question What time .P with the Present Simple. Focus attention on the questions and get students to listen and repeat chorally and individually. Make sure they can reproduce the pronunciation of do you /dju and the falling intonation on the wh- questions.

Drill the question and answer in the speech bubbles and elicit the other questions students can ask. If students need help, write the verbs on the board:

get up, have breakfast, go to work, have lunch, leave work, get home, go to bed.

Get students to practise the questions in open pairs. Students continue in closed pairs, working with a different partner from exercise 2. Monitor and check for correct use of the Present Simple and the times.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 6

Exercises I and 2 Practice of the time.

Exercise 3 First person singular of the Present Simple and further time practice.

KARL'S DAY

Present Simple — he/she/it, usually/sometimes/never

I This section presents the he/she/it positive forms of the Present Simple. Focús attention on the photos of Karl and get students to read the description of him. Check comprehension of millionaire, director, 24-hour, shopping site, and Internet.

Focus attention on the pictures of Karl's day and check comprehension of have a shower, work late, buy, and go

6

out. Focus attention on the example sentence. Get students to continue writing the times, working individually.

Ask students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers

1     six o'clock5 eight o'clock

2     six forty-five  6 nine fifteen     

GRAMMAR SPOT

Focus attention on the examples of third person singular forms gets up and has. Students underline the verbs in sentences 2—8. Check the answers with the class.

2    has             6 buys, eats, gets                

3    leaves, goes              7 goes, works      

4    has             8 goes                                                 

5    works, leaves                         

Elicit the key last letter in each of the verbs (s),

T 6.5

Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students can distinguish the Is/ endings, e.g. gets (gets/ from the /z/ endings, e.g. has /hæz/ (The tapescript gives the complete verb forms including nouns and particles.)

Tapescript

        I gets up                                    6

           has a shower                                    

2     has breakfast           gets home

3     leaves home 7 goes out  goes to work

4     has lunch  8 goes to bed

5     works late

leaves work

2 Focus attention on the adverbs of frequency and their meaning. Make sure that students understand that usually and sometimes are not fixed references and the actual number of times that they refer to can vary. Ask students to underline the examples of usually, sometimes, and never in the sentences about Karl.

T 6.6

Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students reproduce the third person singular ending and encourage them to reproduce the linking in the following sentences:

He sometimes buyea pizza.

He never goes out in the evening.

3     seven fifteen

4     one o'clock

Tapescript

He usually works late.

He sometimes buys a pizza.

He never goes          in the evening.

Read Grammar Reference 6.1 — 6.3 on p124 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Highlight the use of the -es ending, e.g. go — goes. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. If appropriate, point out that the frequency adverbs can be used with to be, but that they usually come after the verb, e.g. I am never at home in the morning.

Focus attention on the example sentences. Make sure students understand that the -s is on the verb in the positive form and on does in the question and negative.

Highlight doesn't as the contracted form of does not. Ask students to circle the -s ending and the use of does/doesn't in the questions and answers in exercise 2.

GRAMMAR SPOT

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 6

Exercise 4 Present Simple he/she/it forms.

Exercises 5 and 6 Present Simple and frequency adverbs usually/sometimes/never.

Questions and negatives

2      This section introduces does/doesn't in the question and negative forms. Both wh- and Yes/No questions are presented at the same time, as students are dealing with the third person singular form only at this stage, and they have already had a lot Of practice of the individual question types.

T 6.7

Refer students back to the pictures of Karl. Read question I aloud and elicit the answer (gets). Students continue completing the answers, working individually. Get them to check in pairs before playing the questions and answers on tape. Play the recording through once and let students check their answers.

Play the recording again, pausing after each question and answer exchange, and get the students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure they can reproduce the falling intonation on the wh- questions and the rising intonation on the Yes/No questions. Students practise the questions and answers in open and then in closed pairs.

Answers and tapescript

I    What time does he get up?

He gets at six otlock.

2 When does he go to bed?

He goes to bed at eleven forty-five. 3 Does he go to work by taxi?

Yes, he does.

4    Does he have lunch in a restaurant?

No, he doesnt

5    Does he go out in the evening? No, he doesn't.

3      Focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles. Drill the question and answer. Elicit two or three more examples with students working in open pairs. Students continue asking and answering in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of third person -s and of does/doesn't in the questions and negatives.

T 6.8

Play the recording and get students to check their answers. If students had difficulties With questions and answers 1—7, drill the questions and answers and get students to practise them in pairs again.

Answers and tapeseript

I    What time does he have breakfast? He breakfast at six forty-five, 2 When does he leave home?

He leaves home at seven fifteen.

3 Does he go to work by bus?

No, he doesn't. He goes to work by taxi. 4 Wtwe does he have lunch? has lunch in his office.

S he usually work late?

he does.

6 he eat in a restaurant?

he doesn't. He sometimes buys a pizza and eats it tn-ne.

 7 Mut does he do in the evening?

 He works at his

GRAMMAR SPOT

I Focus attention on the table. Elicit the forms for you work and don't work) and then get students to complete the rest of the table. Check the answers with the whole class.

                              Positive Negative work               don't work

You work don't work works doesn't work

     She           works        doesn't work

We  work    don't work They        work    don't work


6 serious problems with pronunciation, drill the sentences with the whole class and get them to repeat.

Negatives and pronunciation

3 This exercise practises the negative form and also


 

Highlight again that the he/she form is the only one that is different.

2 Get students to complete the wh- questions, Then check the answers with the class.

 Answers

Highlight the use of does in the second question.

Refer students to Grammar Reference 6.4 on PI 24. Make sure students understand that we repeat do/does or don't/doesn't in the short answers rather than the main verb, i.e. we cannot say. DO you get up at 7.30? *Yes, I get up.

PRACTICE

p44)

 

Katya's day

I Remind students of Karl from the previous section.

Point to the photos of Katya and ask Who is she? (She's Karl's sister.) Pre-teach/check artist, country, early, toast, go for a walk, paint, studio, cook, and play the piano. Read the heading of the text aloud. Ask How old is Katya? and What's herjob? (She's 25. She's an artist.) Focus attention on the example. Elicit the second verb (gets up) and then get students to complete the text, working indivi dually.

T 6.9

Get students to check their answers in pairs before playing the recording and letting them check against the tape.

 Answers and tapescript

Katya is twenty-five. Shes an artist. She lives in a small house  in the country. She usually gets up at ten o'clock in the morning. She never gets up early. She has coffee and toast for breakfast and then she goes for a walk with her dog. She gets  home at eleven otlock and she paints in her studio until  seven o'clock in the evening. Then she cooks dinner and  drinks a glass of wine. After dinner, she sometimes listens to music and she sometimes plays the piano. She usually goes to bed very late, at one or two o'clock in the morning.

highlights the importance of contrastive stress when correcting or disagreeing with a statement. Focus attention on the example and ask positive or negative? about each sentence in the answer (first sentence— negative, second sentence — positive). Explain that the circles indicate where the main stress falls in each sentence.

Pre- teach stay at home for sentence 8. Elicit the answer to sentence 2 (He doesn't get up at ten o'clock. He gets up at six o'clock) Tell students to continue correcting the sentences, referring back to the information about Karl and Katya on pp42 and 44. (With a weaker group, you could do this as a class activity on the board and then play the tape for reinforcement.) Tell them not to worry about the stress in the sentences at this Stage.

T 6.10 Play the recording through once, getting students to check their sentences for grammatical accuracy. Then write the pairs of sentences for numbers 2 and 3 and elicit where the main stress falls with the whole class. Remind students that the stress helps to indicate the main difference in the information in the pairs of sentences, and so falls on the key words.

Get students to work in pairs and mark where they think the main stress falls in the rest of the pairs of sentences. Play the recording again and get students to check their answers. Also, check the answers orally with the whole class in case students have problems hearing the main stress.

Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually.

Answers and tapescript

I She doesn't live in          town She lives the country.

2    He doesn't get up at ten otlock. He gets up at six dclock.

3    She doesnt have a big breakfast. She has coffee ard toast.


2 Focus attention on the two examples. Make sure students realize that he refers to Karl and she to Katya. Get students to complete the answers and then check in

    pairs. Check the answers with the whole class.                     

Ask a few students to read the sentences aloud. Then get students to practise the sentences in pairs. If they have

4    He doesn't have a dog. She has a dog.

5    She doesn't work in an office. She works at home.

6    He doesn't cook dinner in the evening. He buys a pizza 7 She doesn't go to bed early. She goes to bed tate.

8 They dont go out in the evening. They stay at

Talking about you

4                     Demonstrate the activity by writing the names of two people (one male, one female) from your family on the board. Get students to ask you questions about them, using the language in the speech bubbles and the cues in the Student's Book. If students have problems switching from questions with be to the Present Simple questions, drill the language as a class.

Get students to write the name of two family members on a piece of paper. Remind them to choose one male and one female. Students work in pairs and ask and answer about the family members. Monitor and check

for correct use of he/she, his/her and the third person singular Present Simple forms.

SUGGESTION

You could ask students to bring in family photos for the above activity.

Check it

5                     This exercise consolidates the auxiliary forms do/don't and does/doesn'tin Present Simple questions and short answers. Focus attention on number I and elicit the answers (Do, do). Students continue completing the questions and answers, working individually.

Ask students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

1                    'Do you like ice-cream?' 'Yes, I do.'

2                    she work in London?' 'Yes, she does.'

 3 'Where does he work?' 'In a bank.'

4 'Do you go to work by bus?' 'No, I don't.'

5 'Does she go to bed early?' 'No, she doesn't.'

6                     'Do they have a dog?' 'Yes, they da'

7                     he speak German?' 'No, he doesn't.'

 'Do they live in the US? 'No, they don't.'

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 6 Exercise 7 Word order in he/she/it forms of Present Simple wh- questions.

Exercise 8 A reading task to consolidate Present Simple he/she/it forms.

Exercises 9 and 10 Present Simple he/she/it forms in the negative.

Exercise I I he/she/it forms Of Present Simple Yes/No questions.

Exercise 12 A review of do/does/don 't/doesn't.

VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING (SBp46)

Words that go together

I Check comprehension of shopping. Focus attention on the examples. Students continue working in pairs to match the verbs and nouns/phrases.

T 6.11

their answers.

Answers and tapescript

 

get arty

go shopping

go to bed late    

haye a shower

Play the recording and get students to check

toeat in restaurants watch TVdrink beer cookplay the piano officestay at home

2      This is a questionnaire activity to practise Yes/No questions. As a variation, students use Yes, usually., Yes, sometimes., and No, never. in their answers, rather than Yes, I do./No, I don't. This allows them to practise the frequency adverbs in a simple but meaningful way,

T 6.12

Focus attention on the questionnaire, Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually.

3      Focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles. Drill the question and three possible answers. Get students to ask you a few of the questions and give true answers, Demonstrate how to record the answers by putting the three adverbs on the board and ticking under the appropriate one.

Students then work in closed pairs, asking and

answering, and filling in their partner's answers.

4      This follow-up phase allows students to talk about themselves and their partner and so get practice in switching from first to third person. Focus attention on the example and then elicit more information from individual students about themselves and their partner.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 6

6

Exercises 14 A crossword to review vocabulary covered in Units 1—6.

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

Days of the week

1    Explain that students are going to learn the days of the week in English. Play the recording and get students to write the days in the correct order. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure they can distinguish Tuesday and Thursday and that they only produce two syllables in Wednesday / ' wenzdel/.

Answers and tapescript

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

Saturday Sunday

Students practise the days again with each student saying one day of the week in the correct order.

2    Elicit the answer to question 1 as an example. Students do the exercise in pairs. Have a brief feedback session by getting students to give their answers to individual questions.

3    Here students learn which prepositions are used with the days, parts of the day, and times. Elicit the answer for times and the weekend (at) and then get students to write the correct preposition for the other phrases.

T 6.14

Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Highlight the difference between in the evening but on Saturday evening, in the afternoon but on Friday afternoon, etc.

Answers and tapescript on Sunday on Monday on Tuesday on Saturday evening on Thursday morning on Friday afternoon

at nine o'clock at ten thirty at twelve fifteen at the weekend in the morning in the afternoon in the evening

4    Elicit the answer to number I (at) and then get students to complete the other sentences with either in, on, or at. Check the answers. .

Answers l at 2 on 3 in 4 on 5 at

6

Focus attention on the example answers in the speech bubbles. Get students to practise asking and answering questions 1—5 in closed pairs. This allows them to practise the we form of the Present Simple. Get them to complete the sentences in writing about when they do have English lessons. Encourage them to include the day, part of the day, and time: We have English lessons on (Monday evening) at (seven thirty).

5    Students complete the questions with the correct preposition, then ask and answer the questions in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct question formation, use of short answers and prepositions of time. If you have time, conduct a brief feedback session to allow students to talk about their partner and so practise the third person singular.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 6

Exercises 17 and 18 Days of the week.

Exercise 19 Prepositions of time in/on/at.

Don't forget!

Workbook Unit 6

Exercise 13 In this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

Exercise 15 Further listening practice.

Exercise 16 A guided writing task to consolidate the language of routines.

Word list

Ask the students to turn to PI 31 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.

Video

Episode 2 Home movie

Jane has a video camera and is making a film about the new house (and the people in it) for her sister, Alison. David's a reluctant interviewee, Helen rather enjoys it, and Matt has an unpleasant surprise.

Stop and check 2 for Units 4—6 (TB p133).


Question words • it/them this/ that • Adjectives Can I .

Places I

Introduction                         Language aims

to the unit                                                   Question words The question words introduced in previous units are reviewed and how to refer to manner and why are introduced, Who in subject

The title of this unit is 'Places I like' and questions is also included for recognition. it gives practice in describing places.

The grammar input includes revision    Object pronouns Subject pronouns (I, you, he, etc.) are reviewed and object and extension of question words, the           pronouns (me, you, him, etc.) are introduced. Grammar Reference 7.2 also lists introduction Of Object pronouns, and   possessive adjectives so that students can see potential areas of confusion.

the demonstratives this and that. this/ that This and that are introduced in the context of asking about objects: Students get skills practice with a What's this/that? reading and writing section linked to

Vocabulary A set of key everyday adjectives and their opposites is Introduced. the focus on places.

This gives an opportunity to review objects introduced in earlier units. Useful adjectives and their opposites    Students also review the use of a/an + adjective + noun. are introduced and I practised. ? is the Makingfocus of        Everyday English Requests with Can I ? are introduced and practised in a requests with Can         range Of situations. the Everyday English section.

Workbook There are exercises to practise object pronouns and help students with potential confusion with subject pronouns and possessive adjectives.

This, that, and objects are consolidated.

Students practise question words in matching and word order exercises,

Students are given an opportunity to give their own answers to questions. There is an exercise to practise the newly-introduced question word why and answers with because.

The adjectives from the unit are consolidated in a range of exercises.

Students get skills practice with a listening and a reading task.

Requests with Can I ? from Everyday English are reviewed and consolidated.

POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

The similarity between subject and object pronouns, and possessive adjectives often present problems for students. The Student's Book and Workbook give practice to help students with these areas, but be prepared to monitor these areas during pair-work and review as necessary.

Notes on the unit

STARTER

NOTE

How much? and How many? are reviewed together in this exercise. Students have used How much? to talk about prices and How many? to talk about numbers, so they should not have any problem with the matching exercise.


It is not advisable at this stage to present the use of much/many with countable and uncountable nouns. This is covered in New Headway Elementary. Similarly, at this stage, don't explain the use of Who lives     ? in the subject question in number 7 or contrast it with the object question form Who does . ? Just let students recognize which answer goes with Who?

1     Focus attention on the example to demonstrate the activity. Students continue to match the questions and answers, working in pairs,

T 7.1 Play the recording and get students to check their answers.

Answers and tapescript

I What is the capital of Australia?

 Canberra.

2 How old are the Pyramids?

 4,500 years old.

 3 What time do Spanish people have dinner?

Late. At 10.00 in the evening.

4    Where does the American President live?

In the White House.

5    How many floors does the Empire State Building have?

86.

6 How much is a hamburger in the US?

7 Who lives in Buckingham Palace? The Queen of England.

If you feel students need practise with the intonation of wh- questions, play the recording and get them to repeat the questions and answers chorally and individually.

SUGGESTION

To give more practice with question words, you can have a quiz in which the students generate the questions. You can give different groups sets of answers and get them to write the questions. You will need to choose answers that can only generate one question and only focus on the present tense at this stage. Check the questions with each group and then divide the students into pairs so that each student has a different set of questions, Students ask and answer in pairs, scoring a point for each correct answer.

2     Give an example by talking about your favourite town or city. Include known adjectives, e.g. big, small, beautiful, etc., and information about what the place has, e.g. restaurants, hotels-etc. Take the opportunity to pre-teach why and because, which will be used in the next section. Check the pronunciation of because /bl 'koz/.

Elicit another example from a confident student. Students then continue in pairs. Monitor and check, but only feedback on major errors. Let students have the opportunity to say what they can in a relatively free way.

I LOVE IT HERE!  

it/them, this/that

 This exercise reviews questions and answers, including why and because. Review these words but don't pre-teach all the new vocabulary unless you feel students will have difficulty understanding from context. If this is the case or if you have a weak group, you can pre-teach/check the following by referring to a film star students will know: famous, film star, journalist, fantastic, nice, first, movie (American usage), visit (verb), vacation (American usage), wedding, happy, together.

Focus attention on the photo of Céline. Ask questions to get students to predict information about her: ( What's her job? Where is shefrom? Where is she now? Is she married? Does she have children?)

T 7.2

Play the recording through once and get students to check the predictions above: (She's a film star. She's from the United States. She's in her house in London now.

Yes, she is. Yes, she does.)

Play the recording again and get students to complete the conversation.

Get the students to check in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers and tapescript

G This is a very beautiful house.

C Thank you. I like it very much, toa

G Céline, you're American. Why do you live here in Londm?

C Because I just love it here! The people are fantastic! I love  them! And of course, my husband, Charles, is     and I  love him, too!

G Thatsa very nice photo. Who are they?

C My sons. Thaes Matt, and thaesJack. They go to school here. My daughters at school in the US. Her names

     G Why does Lisa-Marie goto school in        US?

C Because stE lives with her father. My first husband, you know, the actor Dan Brat. I hate Hm and all his movies

I never watch them

G I see. And does Lisa-Marie visit you?

C Oh, yes. She visits me every vacation. She's here with  me now.

G And is this a photo of you and Charles?

C Oh yes. Ys us in Hawaii. Ys our wedding. We're so happy together!

2      Get students to practise the conversation in closed pairs while you monitor. If students have problems with pronunciation and intonation, drill key sentences and then get students to continue practising the conversation in closed pairs.

3      This exercise reviews Present Simple questions and answers, and also practises object pronouns and why and because. Focus on the example and remind students of the use of does in the third person question. Students complete the sentences, working individually.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

3

4      Where do her sons go to school?

In England.

5      Why does Lisa-Marie go to school jn the US? she lives with her father.

GRAMMAR SPOT

Check comprehension of the terms subject and object pronouns by writing this simple table on the board.

S*ct Veb Object like  you. like        it.  likes  them.  like him.

1     Focus attention on the examples What and How old from sentences I and 2 in Starter exercise I. Elicit the question words in sentences 3 and 4 ( What time and Where). Students continue underlining the question word(s) in Starter exercises I and 2. Check the answers with the whole class.

2     Focus attention on the table in the Student's Book and on the examples. Get students to complete the object pronouns, working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class.

                                               prono'm I

Object pronolm me you him her it us them

Ask students to underline the object pronouns in the conversation in exercise I.

3     Elicit the first examples of this and that in the conversation in exercise I (This is a very beautiful house. That's a very nice photo.) Students continue to find examples of this and that.

Read Grammar Reference 7.1—7.3 on p124 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it.

What's that?

I Pre-teach/check the use of What's this? by holding an object/picture of an object close to you and eliciting the answer It's a (book). Repeat the procedure for What's that? by pointing to an object/picture of an object at a distance from you. Drill the questions and answer It's a/an . chorally and individually. Make sure you include an object/picture of an object beginning with a vowel so that students review It's an (ice-cream).

Focus attention on the picture. Review the names of all the objects, without asking What's this/that?at this stage, and check the pronunciation. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Drill the examples in open pairs and then get students to ask and answer about the objects in the pictures in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of What's this/that? Check the answers by getting students to ask and answer across the class.

Whats that? Ifs a dog / camera / bag / photograph / glass /

What's this? Its a/an phone / television / orange / sandwich / dictionary / cat.

2 Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Drill the language across the clåss and then get students to continue asking about Objects in the classroom in closed pairs. Encourage them to use the possessive 's where appropriate, e.g. It's Juan's book, Monitor and check for correct use of What's this/that? and the possessive 's.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 7

Exercises 4 and 5 this and that.

I like them!

3     This section practises object pronouns and allows students to personalize the language by talking about people and things. Pre-teach/check hate and of course. Focus attention on the example and make sure students understand what the answer it refers back to (ice-cream). Students complete the other sentences, working individually.

 Get students to check their answers in pairs before letting them check against the tape. Ask students what the pronoun refers back to each time (given in brackets in the key below). Sentence 5 assumes the teacher is a woman. Check what pronoun would be used if the teacher were a man (him).


 Answers and tapescript             

I Do you like ice-cream?

Yes, I love it. (ice-cream) 2 Do you like dogs?

No, I hate them. (dogs) 3 Do you like me?

Of course I like you! (me)

4     Does your teacher teach you French? No, she teaches us English. (you) 5 Do you like your teacher?            

We like her very much, (your teacher)

What do you like?

4 Check comprehension of the items in the list. Focus attention on the speech bubbles and check comprehension of love, hate, and all right. This can be done with simple board drawings of faces — a smiling face for love, a neutral face for all right, and a frowning face @ for hate.

Drill the language in the speech bubbles chorally and individually. Check for correct sen tence stress in the answers:

Yes, I do. I love it.

No, I don't. I hate it.

It's all right.

Get students to give two or three more examples in open pairs across the class. Then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for the correct use of object pronouns.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 7

Exercises 1—3 Consolidation of object pronouns.

Questions and answers

5     Pre-teach/check champagne, marry, maths, homework, present (noun). Focus attention on the question in the example and review the fOrmation Of the third person Present Simple question. Focus attention on the answer and review the use of third person -s and the object pronoun it. Check students know what the pronoun refers back to (champagne).

T 7.4

Give students time to write the questions and answers individually and then ask and answer in pairs. Monitor and check for grammatical accuracy. Play the recording and get students to check their answers.

 Answers and tapescript        

1    Why does Céline drink champagne?

            Because she likes it.

2    Why do you eat oranges?

Because I like them.

3    Why does Annie want to marry Peter?

Because she Coves him.

4    Why do you eat Chinese food?

Because I like it.

5    Why don't you like your maths teacher?

Because he gives us a lot of homework.

6    Why does Miguel buy presents for Maria?

         Because he loves her.

If students had a lot of problems with the question formation or the object pronouns, go over the key grammar in each question and answer and then get students to listen and repeat each exchange.

6     Pre-teach/check learn, start (verb), a lot (of groups). Check comprehension of How? to refer to manner by focusing on the answer to question I (By bus.). Then get students to continue matching the questions and answers, working individually.

T 7.5

Play the recording and get students to check their answers.

Answers and tapescript

I How do you come to school?

By bus.

2     What do you have for breakfast?

Toast and coffee.

3     Who is your favourite pop group?

I don't have a favourite. I like a lot.

4     Where does your father work?

 In an office in the centre of town.

5     Why do you want to learn English?    

Because it's an international language.

6 How much money do you have in your bag?

Not a lot. About two pounds.

7     When do lessons start at your school?

They start at nine o'clock.

8     How many languages does your teacher speak?

Get students to practise the questions and answers in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and intonation. If students have problems, drill the questions and answers chorally. Demonstrate the personalization phase by getting the students to ask you the questions. Students then continue in closed pairs, talking about themselves.

Check it

7 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

I What do you do at the weekend?

2    Who is your boyfriend?

3    How much money do you have?        

4    1 dorftdrinkbeer. I don't like it.

5    ax teacher gives us a lot of homework. 6 loves me and I love her.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 7

Exercises 6—8 Further practice of question words.

Exercise 9 why and because.

Adjectives

I This exercise introduces some key adjectives and their opposites and also reviews it's and they're. Focus attention on the pictures and the example. Get students to tell you any other of the adjectives they recognize or let them guess. Pre-teach the remaining adjectives, using mime. Elicit a plural example to remind students of the use of They're. Make sure students understand they only have to write It's/They're and the appropriate adjective, not the name of the objects.

T 7.6

Play the recording and get students to check their answers in pairs.

Answers and tapescript

 

I les lovely.

6 It's small.                                        

2 Its horrible.                                              

7 He's hot.             

3 Therre old.                                       

8 She' cold.                                           

4 Therre new.9 Theyre expensive. 5 Its big.10 Theyrecheap.

Drill the pronunciation of the sentences chorally and individually.

2 Focus attention on the adjectives and opposites. Elicit the opposite of new as an example (old). Get students to write the other opposites in the table and then to check their answers in pairs.

Adjective

Opposite                          old

expensive

cheap

lovely

horrible

small

big

cold

SUGGESTION

You can practise adjective and noun combinations in

the 'pictionary'-type activity on TB pl I I.

Ask students to work in pairs. You will need one copy of the worksheet cut up into cards for each pair. Each student takes an adjective card and a noun card. If their

noun card cannot be matched with their adjective card then they replace it at the bottom of the pile and take another, until they find a combination which they are able to depict in a drawing. Each student then draws a picture of their combination. When thev have finished drawing, they show their pictures to their partner, asking What this? Partners have to guess which adjective/noun combinations have been depicted, and reply using It's a(n) .. . . Continue until all the adjective cards have been used.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 7

Exercises 11—13 Consolidation of adjectives from the unit.

READING AND WRITING

p53)

A postcard from Dublin

I This section extends the focus on adjectives in the context of a description of a place. Focus attention on the photos and elicit information about the places shown, e.g. Is it a hot place? Is it in the United States? Where do you think it is? Tell students they are going to read and listen to the postcard. Encourage them to guess the meaning of new words.

T 7.7

Play the recording and get students to follow in

their books. Check comprehension of the following, using the context to help where possible: on holiday, comfortable, friendly, delicious, building, weather, wet, see you soon.

2      Elicit the answer to question I as an example (It's from Dona and Sergio.) Get students to answer the other questions, working individually. Check the answers with the whole class.

Answers

I Its from Dona and Sergio.

2   Theyrein Dublin.

3   They're on holiday.

4   Yes,itis.

5   The weather.

3      Focus attention on the adjectives Dona and Sergio use to describe their hotel. Get students to continue finding the appropriate adjectives. Point out that for Dublin they will need to use a negative formed with not.


Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Adjectives friendly delicious good lovely beautiful, big, not expensive horrible, wet, cold

T 7.8

2Explain that students are going to hear Keiko, a Japanese girl, in different places in town. Focus on the example and play the first conversation. Play the other four conversations, pausing after each one. Get students to complete their answers, choosing from the options in exercise l. Play the conversations through again if necessary. Check the answers with the whole class. Highlight the use of at with railway station, rather than in.

           Where is she?              What does        want?

        I Ina café.                        To have a ham sandwich.

       2 Ina clothes shop.         To try on a jumper.

3 In an Internet café.        To send an email.

       Ina bank                   TO change a travellds Cheque.

5 Ata railway station. To buy a return ticket


Irish people the food Irish music the beer Dublin the weather

4 Focus attention on the skeleton of the postcard. Check comprehension of beach. You can get students to write their postcard in full in class, feeding in vocabulary where relevant, or give it for homework. With a weaker class, you could draft the postcard as a class activity on the board, and then get students to write a different postcard for homework, based very closely on the draft.


ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 7

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

 

 

Exercise 15 Further reading practice.

Can I

I This section focuses on requests in everyday situations. Students are introduced to Can I . . . but do not give a detailed explanation of the grammar of can at this stage. Check comprehension of the vocabulary in the activities list by reading out each activity and getting students to point to the correct picture. Check comprehension of any other individual words, e.g. ham, return ticket. Repeat this procedure for the places vocabulary, Students then write the correct numbers and letters for each picture. Check the answers.

Answers (clockwise from top left)

5a 2c Id 4e 3b

3     Focus attention on the gapped conversations. Preteach/check changing room, PC (personal computer), pay, at the end, Can I help you?, change (noun in money context). Elicit as many answers for conversation I as the students can remember. Play the recording and get students to check. Students continue to complete the other conversations, working in pairs.

Play the recording again and get students to check] complete their answers.

Answers and tapescript I A Yes, please!

A OK.

A Two

K There you are. A Thanks a lot.

C   OK. PC K How

D  OK.

5

E   Swe.

K Thank you.



Get students to practise the conversations in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and intonation. If students have problems, drill key sections chorally and then get students to repeat the closed pairwork-

4     Check comprehension of jacket, T-shirt, and single ticket. Put students in pairs and assign a role, A or B, to each student. Make sure they understand that they have to ask about the things in their list. Check students know which item can go with which conversation: conversation I — a coffee, an ice-cream conversation 2 — this jacket, this T-shirt conversation 5 — a return ticket to Edinburgh, a single ticket to Manchester

Elicit likely prices for a coffee and an ice-cream. Choose a pair of students to demonstrate the conversation with Student A asking for a coffee. Then choose another pair, with Student B asking for an ice-cream. Get students to continue practising the conversations, working in closed pairs and taking it in turns to be the assistant and the customer. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and intonation. If students have problems, drill key sections of the conversations and get them to practise again in pairs.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 7

Exercises 16 and 17 Further practice in making requests with Can I ?

Don't forget!

Workbook Unit 7

Exercise 10 Further listening practice.

Exercise 14 In this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

Word list

Ask the students to turn to pl 32 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.

Unit •


Introduction to the unit

The title of this unit is 'Where live' and the theme is homes. There is/are and any are introduced in the context of talking and asking about rooms and furniture. Prepositions of place are reviewed and extended. There is a range of skills practice, including a reading and speaking section on the city of Sydney, and a listening and writing section on the students' own home town.

The lexical set is of rooms and furniture. The language of asking about local amenities and giving directions is introduced and practised in the Everyday English section.

Rooms and furniture

There is/are • any

Prepositions • Directions

Language aims

There ware There is/areare introduced in the positive, question, and negative forms.

any Any is introduced for negatives and plural questions with the structure there is/are. It is not used with any other structures at this stage so that students have the opportunity to get used to using it. Some is included for recognition, but is not given a full presentation or contrasted with any, as this is covered in New Headway Elementary.

POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

• There is/are

Students will be familiar with the forms is/are from their knowledge of the verb to be. However, students may find it confusing to have a singular and plural form to talk about what exists, especially if the equivalent structure has a single form in their own language.

Students can also confuse there and their, so they may need help in this area in written work. In terms of pronunciation, students need practice in the /ð/ sound in there and also need help with linking There's a and There are. The intonation of the question form may need careful drilling. Students should be encouraged to use a broad voice range, starting high with a fall in the voice and then ending the question with a rise. any

Students often ask what any means, as there is usually no direct translation in their own language. There is of course no real answer to this, so simply tell students that they need to use any in negatives and plural questions with there is/are. Students also sometimes have a tendency to use any in the positive, so be prepared to monitor and check for this.

Prepositions Of place In, on, under, and next to are introduced and practised in the context of talking about furniture in rooms.

Vocabulary The lexical set is of rooms and furniture. Students are given the opportunity to personalize the language by talking about their own home.

Everyday English This covers the language of asking about local amenities and giving simple directions.

Workbook The lexical set of rooms and furniture is consolidated.

There is/are and any are practised in a range of exercises.

There is a word stress exercise, reviewing key language from this and earlier units.

The prepositions of place from the unit are practised.

There is further practice in reading and writing.

The language of local amenities and directions from

Everyday English is consolidated in a range of exercises.

Notes on the unit

I Focus attention on the questions in exercise I. Pre-teach/ check garden and the difference between house and flat. You can draw these on the board to highlight the difference. Demonstrate the activity by talking briefly about your own home. Only include language that students have already met, e.g. adjectives big, small, etc. As a class, students talk briefly about where they live.

T 8.1

2Focus attention on the picture of the house. Play the recording and get students to point to the correct room and repeat the words chorally and individually. Check for accurate pronunciation of: kitchen       kLtfn/ toilet        Ptõllat/

Tapescript living room room

toilet

3 Focus attention on the example. Then get students to find the rest of the things in the house and write the correct number, working in pairs. Check the answers with the class.

         I abed                                  4 aTV

6 a CD playerIl a picture

12 a cooker3 a shower

7 an8 a magazine

       9 a sofa                             10 a table

2 a lamp5 a video recorder

T 8.2

Students listen and repeat the words chorally and individually. Check for accurate pronunciation and word stress on: shower /' Jaua/ picture / 'plktJa/ sofa /'saofa/ magazine mæga'zi:n/

NICOLE'S LIVING ROOM

 

 

There is/are, any

I Focus attention on the photograph and the rubric for exercise I. Ask What's her name? (Nicole) and Where is she? (In her living room.).

T 8.3

Play the recording through once and get students to read and listen to the text, not writing anything at this stage. Write the sentence There's a sofa atld there are a lot of books on the board. Underline There's and there are. Focus attention on the first gap and elicit the answer ( There). Play the recording again and get students to complete the text. Check the answers with the whole class.

 Answers and tapeseript

My living room isn't very big, but I love it. There's a sofa, and there are two armchairs. Therú a small table with a TV on it, md ttære are a lot of books.      a CD player, and there

CDs. There are pictures on the wall, and there are lamps. It's a very comfortable room.

If students query the use of some, ask How many CDs? and elicit We don't know to get over the idea of indefinite quantity.

2 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Write the sentences on the board and ask Singular or plural?

There's a sofa — singular and There are two armchairs— plural). If you know the students' mother tongue, you can translate There is/are. If you don't, they should be able to pick up the meaning from the context.

Drill the language in the speech bubbles chorally and individually. Check students can accurately reproduce the linking in both forms:

There's a sofa.

There are two armchairs.

Elicit more singular and plural examples from the class, using the other nouns in the exercise. Students then repeat the sentences working in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of there is and there are.

Get students to practise there is and there are with the objects in the classroom. Write lists on the board of the things vou have in your classroom, e.g. Singular a picture, a table, a TV, a photo

       Plural        lots of books, chairs, desks, bags

Students work in pairs and take it in turns to make sentences about objects in the classroom. Monitor and check for correct use of there is and there are.

form and short answers. Focus attention on the questions and answers. Play the recording and get students to listen to the questions and repeat chorally

Unit 8 •

T 8.4

3In this exercise, students practise the question

and individually. Check students can accurately reproduce the intonation in the question, and the linking in the short answers:

Are there any photographs?

Yes, there is.

No, there isn't.

Yes, there are.

No, there aren't.

Highlight the singular and plural forms and point out that we use any in questions in the plural. Get students to practise the questions and answers in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct formation of the questions and short answers, and the correct use of any.

GRAMMAR SPOT

Focus attention on the completed examples. Check students know that there's is singular and is the contracted form of there is, and that Are there is plural, Focus attention on the gapped sentences. Check students notice that the first and third gaps require plural forms and the second gap singular by focusing on the nouns. Students then complete the sentences.

Give students the opportunity to practise the negative statements by referring to the classroom, e.g. There isn't a CD player. There aren't any magazines. Write a list of nouns on the board and get students to make negative sentences.

Read Grammar Reference 8.1 and 8.2 on p125 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it,

4     Tell students they are going to talk about Nicole's living room. Check comprehension of the items in the list. Focus attention on the speech bubbles and get students to ask and answer the questions in open pairs. Elicit one or two more exchanges using different nouns and then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct formation of the questions and short answers, and the correct use of any,

Check the answers with the whole class by getting students to ask and answer across the class.

Is there a TV?

Yes, there is.

Are there any pictures?

Yes, there are.

Is there a radio?No, there isdt.

     Is there a CD playeê?                   Yes, there is.

      Is there a telephone?                   No, there isn't.

Is there a video recorder?Yes, there is,

Are there any lamps?Yes, there are.

Are there any photographS?No, there arent.

5     Demonstrate the activity by describing your own living room. Include positive and negative sentences. Get students to work in closed pairs. Encourage students to ask questions if their partner runs out of things to say. Monitor and check for correct use of there is/are in all forms, any, and pronunciation and intonation. Feed back on any common errors with the whole class.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Uni t 8

Exercises 1—3 Further practice of rooms and furniture vocabulary.

Exercises 4—8 Further practice of there is/are and any in a range of exercises.

NICOLE'S BEDROOM

 

 

Prepositions

I Focus attention on the prepositions. Check students understand the difference between in and on by putting something in your book and then on your book and eliciting the correct preposition.

2      Focus attention on the photograph. Ask mat room is this? (Nicole's bedroom.) Briefly review the vocabulary in the picture by pointing to the objects/furniture and eliciting the correct word. Pre-teach/check the new vocabulary in the gap-fill: car keys, drawer, and floor.

Focus attention on the example. Students then complete the sentences, working individually.

T 8.5

Get students to check in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers and tapescript I Nic¾ mobile phone is on the bed 2 The magazine is next to the phone.

3 Her CD player is on the floor nexttothe bed, 4 Her car keys are in the drawer.

5 Herbagismthefloortmderthechair. 6 The books are under her bed.

Students practise the sentences, Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation. If students have problems, drill the sentences and get students to practise them again.

3      This exercise practises questions with Where? and the prepositions, Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Remind students of the singular form is and the plural

form are. Highlight the use of It's in the singular answer and They're in the plural. Drill the questions and answers

chorally and individually. Make sure students can

reproduce the falling intonation on the questions. Check

comprehension of the items in the lists. Elicit two or

three more exchanges using the nouns in the list.



Students then continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of is/are, It's/They're and the prepositions.

Check the answers with the whole class by getting students to ask and answer across the class.

I WhereSherCDpIayer?ItSonthefloornexttothebed.

2                              Where are her CDs? Theyre on the floor.

3                              her lamp? It's the table next to the computer.

4                              Where are her car keys? Theyre in the drawer.

5                              her pens? Therre in her bag.

6                              Where are her shoes? Theyre under the bed.

7                              Where's her computer? les on the table.

8                              Where are her clothes? Theyre on the chair.

9                              Where are her credit cards? Therreinthedrawer.

4 Give students time to write about six questions each. Demonstrate the activity by closing your eyes and getting students to ask you one or two questions. Then get them to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of is/are, It's/They're and the prepositions.

SUGGESTION

You can use the picture Of Nicole's bedroom on p58 to review there is/are in the positive, negative, and in questions. This can be done as a warm-up activity at the beginning of a lesson or as a 'filler'. For further practice, bring in pictures of rooms from magazines. These can be used for vocabulary consolidation, question and answer practice, and describe and draw activities.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 8

Exercises 10—12 Further practice Of the prepositions of place from the unit.

Questions and answers

I Focus attention on the example. Then get students to write the words in the correct order to form questions.

T 8.6

Play the recording and get students to check their answers.

Answers and tapescript

 Do you live in a house or a flat?

2     How many bedrooms are there?

3     Is there a telephone in the kitchen?

4     Is there a television in the living room?

5     Is there a video recorder under the television?

6     Are there a lot Of books in your bedroom? 7 Are there any pictures on the wall?

2 Demonstrate the activity by asking a few students the questions in exercise I. Students continue asking and answering in closed pairs. Encourage them to ask different questions from those in exercise I. Monitor and check.

Different rooms

3 This is an information gap using different pictures. Tell students that they are going to work with a partner and ask questions to find the difference between two similar pictures of a room. Pre-teach/check window. Divide the class into pairs. Refer the Student As to p59 and Student Bs to p 139. Tell them they shouldn't look at each other's picture. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles and drill the language. Tell students to circle the differences they find in their pictures. Students work in pairs to find all six differences. Monitor and check. Students compare their pictures to check they have found the differences.

T 3.7

4Tell students they are going to hear a description of one of the rooms and that they have to decide which one it is. Play the recording through once and get students to vote for either picture A or B. If there is disagreement, play the recording again. Check the answer with the whole class.

Answer

Student A's picture, p59

 

T 8.7

The living room

Therds a cat on the sofa and ther& a telephone on a small table next to the sofa. a CD player with some CDs under it. Not a lot of CDs. There isn't a television and there aren't any pictures or photographs the walls. There's one lamp, its next to the table with the telephone. There are two tables and two armchairs. There are some books under one of the tables.

Check it

5 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence.

 Answers

I Is there a sofa in the living room?

2    Therega CD player.

3    Are there any lamps?

4    Your keys are in the drawer.

5    The lamp is next to the bed.

8 •

READING AND SPEAKING

 

 

Sydney

I Ask students What do you know about Australia? and let students give any information that they know. Focus attention on the photos. Ask students to find the Opera House as an example and then get students to find the other things in the lists, working in pairs. Monitor and help as necessary,

2 This text is slightly longer than in previous units and there are some new words. Tell students not to worry if they don't understand every word and just to focus on the matching task. Check comprehension of the headings. Get students to read the text as far as it is very hot. Elicit what heading goes in the first space ( When to go). Students continue reading and putting in the headings.

T 8.8

Play the recording and get students to check their answers.

Answers and tapescript

How to have a good time in.

Sydney

Sydney has everything you want in a city. Its beautiful, it has old and new buildings, there are fantastic beaches, and the food is delicious.

When to go

The best times to visit are spring and auturnn, In summer it is

very hot. Where to stay

There are cheap hotels in Kings Cross. A room is about $0 a night. There are international hotels in the centre. Here a room is about $150 a night.

What to do

Sydney has theatres and cinemas, and of course, the Opera House. The best shops are in Pitt Street.

Go to the harbour. There are beaches, walks, parks, and cafés and, of course, the wonderful bridge,

Sydney has the famous Bondi Beach. People go swimming, surfing, windsurfing, and sailing.

For night-life, there are clubs and bars in Oxford Street.

What to eat

There are restaurants from every country — Italian, Turkish, Lebanese, Japanese, Thai, Chinese, and Vietnamese. Australians eat a lot of seafood — ifs very fresh!

How to travel

There are fast trains and slow buses. The best way to see Sydney is by ferry.

Check comprehension of the following vocabulary: everything, spring, autumn, summer, theatre, walk, park, surfing, night-life, club, Turkish, Lebanese, Thai, Vietnamese, seafood, fresh, fast, train, slow.

3     Focus attention on the examples in the chart. Students continue finding the nouns and adjectives, working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class,

Answers

Adjective

 

old/new

delicious

buildings beaches

hotels in King's Cross

hotels in the centre

Bondi Beach

4     Elicit the answer to the first question as an example (The best times to go are spring and autumn.) Students ask and answer in closed pairs. Monitor and help where necessary. Check the answers.

Answers

I The best times to go are spring and auturrn 2 No. There are cheap hotels in Kings Cross.

3     People go shopping in Pitt Street.       

They go swimming, surfing, windsurfing, and sailing at the beach.

They go to clubs and bars in Oxford Street.

4     There are Italian, Turkish, Lebanese, Japanese, Thai, Chinese, and Vietnamese restaurants in Sydney. 5 The best way to see Sydney is by ferry.

LISTENING AND WRITING

My home town

T 8.9

1Focus attention on the photograph. Ask What's his name? (Darren) and Where does he live? (Bondi, Sydney). Focus attention on the example. Play the tape as far as We live in Bondi and we all love surfing. Tell students they are going to listen to the rest of the recording, Tell them to focus just on the list of things at this stage and not to worry about the details of what Darren says. Make sure students understand they have to write for the things Darren talks about and X for the things he doesn't. Play the recording through once and get students to complete the task. Let them check in pairs and play the recording through again if necessary. Check the answers with the whole class.

Darren talks about: his brother, surfing, train, the Harbour,

Opera House, his girlfriend, Oxford Street, ferry, Manly Beach

Focus attention on the information Darren gives about his brother. Tell students to listen to the recording again and to focus on the details of what Darren says about each thing. Play the recording through again if necessary. Check the answers with the whole class.

says:

his brother: Darren lives in a house with his brother and a friend.

surfing: They (Darren, his brother, and a friend) alt toye surfing. They often go surfing in the morning before work train: He goes to work by train.

the Harbour: His office is in Macarthur Street, very near the

the Opera House: They go running near the Opera House.

his girlfriend: His girlfriend likes to go shopping on Saturday.

Street There are some great clothes shops in Oxford

Street

Manly Beach: They go to Manly Beach on Sunday if the weather is good.

ferry: They go to the beach by ferry.

T 8.9

G'day! My name is Darren, and I live in a house with my brother and a friend. We live in Bondi and we all love surfing.

We Often go surfing in the morning before work. I'm an engineer. I work in the centre of Sydney for a big international company. I go to work by train. My office is in Macarthur Street, very near the Harbour. On Monday, Wednesday, and Friday I go running at lunchtime. Its very hot in summer, but its beautiful. I sometimes go with friends from work. We run near the Opera House.

My girlfriend likes to go shopping on Saturday. There is a great market in Paddington, and there are some great clothes shops in Oxford Street. On Saturday night, we often go to Chinatown. The food is fantastic, and really cheap. Or we stay in Bondi because there are a lot of really good little Thai and Italian restaurants here.

I usually relax on Sunday. When the weather is good, we go to the beach, Manly Beach. We go by ferry. When ifs wet, we go to the pub.

2 Get students to ask you the questions in the Student's Book and give true answers. Write up relevant vocabulary on the board in the categories given below and get students to add to each list, e.g.

Where/live? house with a garden, flat, in the centre, near the beach

Where/work/go to school? in a hospital/office/school/ shop/restaurant/café, from home, in the centre of town, near my house

What do/with your friends? go to restaurants/the cinema/theatre/lnternet café, watch TV/videos, play football/tennis, go shopping/swimming/sailing/surfing/ windsurfing

Where/go shopping? in the town centre, at the supermarket/department store/clothes shop/market

What do/when go out? see friends, go to clubs and bars (also see above examples of pastimes with friends.) Put the students into groups and get them to talk about their home town or a town they like. Get them to refer to the ideas on the board to help them, but also encourage them to say as much as they can for themselves. Monitor and check, but only help if asked, as it's important for students to have the opportunity for free practice and to rely on each other for help. Feed back on any common errors but only focus on things which are potential blocks to communication. Correcting everv small mistake will only discourage the class.

3 This writing task can be done in class or for homework. Téll students they are going to write about a town they know. Focus attention on the paragraph headings and the ideas. If you have time, you might like to build up a full writing model on the board, based on the town where students are studying. If the writing is done in class, get students to exchange their descriptions with a partner for checking/editing. If vou check the writing, feed back on any general errors, but again do not pick up on every small mistake.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 8

Exercises 13 and 14 Further reading and writing practice.

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

 

 

Directions

 Pre-teach/check the items in the box. Drill the pronunciation chorallv, Demonstrate the activity by getting students to find and point to the bank and the chemist. Students continue locating the places on the map,

2 Focus attention on the signs. Copy them onto the board and drill the pronunciation of turn left, turn right, and go straight on.

Answers a turn left b turn right


c go straight on

8 •


3   Tell students they are going to listen to some directions which they have to follow on the map. Tell students to find the start point YOU ARE HERE on the map. Play the first conversation as an example and get students to follow on the map.

Play the rest of the conversations, pausing after each one and getting students to write in their final location. Get students to check in pairs. Play the recording again and get students to check/complete their answers.

Check the answers with the whole class. If students had problems, go over the exercise again, holding up your book and following the route as you read the tapescript aloud.

Answers I Atthe chemist.

       2 At the park.                

3     At the railway station.

4     At the Chinese restaurant.

5     At the Internet café.

T 8.10

I Go down Kings Road. Turn right at the Grand Hotel into Charles Street. les next to the cinema.

2 Go straight on, past Charles Street and past Park Lane. on the left, next to the supermarket.

     3 Go down King's Road. Turn right at the church. Go down Station Road. It's a big building on the right.

4 Go down Kings Road. Turn left at the bank into Charles Street. Its on the right, next to the theatre.

5 Go straight on. les on Kings Road, on the left, next to the post office.             

Refer students to the tapescript on pl 16. Get students to practise in pairs. Monitor and check. If they have problems with pronunciation, drill key phrases and then get them to repeat the pairwork.

4      Focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles. Drill the language chorally and individually. Check students can reproduce the falling intonation on Excuse me! and the rise on Is there a . near here?

Excuse me!

Is therea ... near here?

Elicit the directions to the cinema and the post Office as examples. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check.

5      Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Check comprehension of get to, bus station, go out, and far. Drill the language chorally and individually. Briefly review the numbers 1—50 by getting students to count round the class in fives. This will help students with the numbers of minutes. Get one pair of students to practise the conversation in front of the class. Students then continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 8

Exercises 16—18 Further practice of giving directions.

Don't forget!

Workbook Unit 8

Exercise 9 Word stress,

Exercise 15 In this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

Word list

Ask the students to turn to PI 33 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.

Video

Episode 3 Do it yourself

Helen is tired of her bedroom but isn't the decorating kind.

Jane, David, and Matt offer to decorate it for her. So while Helen goes out for the day, the other three choose the colour, paint her room, and wait for Helen to return. VThen Helen does get back, her reaction isn't quite what they had bargained for.

EXTRA IDEAS UNITS 5-8

On TB pl 12 there are additional photocopiable activities to review the language from Units 5—8. There is a reading text with tasks, a question formation exercise, and a matching activity on everyday English. You will need to pre-teach]check fridge, message, and light (adjective) for the reading text.


Introduction to the unit

The title of this unit is 'Happy Birthday!' and it focuses on the birth dates and lives of famous people. This is the vehicle for the presentation of was/were born, which is extended to general uses of the past of to be. The positive forms Of Past Simple irregular verbs are also presented in a story context. Students learn how to say dates In English with focuses on months, ordinal numbers, and years. Skills practice is provided in the Vocabulary and reading section.

Language aims

Saying years The Starter section teaches students how to read dates in English, This highlights dates before 2000, e.g. 1961 — nineteen sixty-one, and the use of and in dates after 2001, e.g. 2008 — two thousand and eight.

POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

How students say dates in their own language can often create problems with dates in English. Some languages divide the date differently,

e.g. 1999— *one thousand nine hundred and ninety-nine, so students need help with dividing the century and years correctly. The use of and in dates after 2001 also needs highlighting.

was/were The past of to be is introduced in all forms. Students' first contact with the past forms is with was/were born, and then students move on to general uses of was/were.

POSSIBLE PROBLEMS was/were

Students usually make the switch from present of beto past relatively smoothly, although they need a lot of practice in which subjects take was and which take were. Pronunciation can present a problem in that the vowels in was and were both have weak and strong forms: was /a/ and /D/; and were/a/ and 3:/. The weak form la/ is in the positive and question forms, and strong forms ID/ and /3:/ are in negatives and short answers:

She was at school.                           /Ji: waz at sku:l/

She wasn't at school.                       /Si: woznt at sku:l]

Was she at school?                                       /woz Ti: at sku:l/

Yes, she was./ No, she wasn't.          /jes Ji: waz/ /nao Ji: woznt/

They were at school,                       /ðer wa(r) at sku:l/

They weren't at school.                               /ðer w 3:nt at sku:V

Were they at school?                      /w3: ðer (j)at sku:l/

Yes, they were./No, they weren't.     /jes ðer w3:/ /nao ðet wa:nt/

The pronunciation of the negative forms is highlighted and practised in the Negatives and pronunciation section on p67.

was/were born The equivalent structure in students' own language is often different, leading students to say *I am born or * I born. The unit provides a whole section on this structure to help students become familiar with the correct forms.

Past Simple — irregular verbs The unit introduces the Past Simple in the positive, The focus is on a limited number Of irregular verbs which are presented as a lexical set in a story context. This allows students to get initial familiarization with some of the highest frequency irregular past forms before

9 •

they move on to the use of did in negatives and questions in Unit 10.

POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

There are a lot of irregular verbs for students to learn in the course of their studies. The initial presentation is limited to a small number of verbs and students access them by matching to their present forms. Students are referred to the irregular verb list on p142 to help them do this and they should be encouraged to refer to the list as they work through the remaining units in the book.

Vocabulary This is the small number of irregular past forms which students use to complete a story,

Everyday English This covers months of the year, ordinal numbers in dates, and personalizes the language by talking about students' birthdays.

Workbook Saying years is consolidated in writing and listening exercises. A listening exercise reviews family vocabulary and further consolidates years.

was/were born is further practised.

was/were is consolidated through a range of exercises, including guided writing, question formation tasks, cued sentences, and gap-fill. Some of these exercises are based on profiles of famous people from the past.

Irregular pasts are further practised.

Vocabulary from earlier units is reviewed and consolidated in a categorizing activity.

The Everyday English section focuses on months, ordinal numbers, and dates,

Notes on the unit

T 9.1

1 Briefly review numbers 1—20 round the class. Write numbers in the 30s, 40s, 50s, etc. on the board to review numbers up to 100. Pre-teach/Check a thousand. Play the recording for the first date and focus attention on the answer. Play the rest of the recording and get students to underline the correct date.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers and tapescript

I fourteen twenty-six

2     seventeen ninety-nine

3     eighteen eighty

4     nineteen thirty-nine

5     nineteen sixty-one         

6     two thousand and seven

9

O

Focus attention on the Caution BOX' Read the first two dates aloud and write them on the board. Highlight that we divide the dates like this in English:

                           18-41     19-16

T 9.2

Focus attention on the last three dates. Read them aloud and highlight the use of and in dates after 2000. Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Elicit how we read each of the dates in exercise I. Then get students to practise saying the dates in closed pairs. Monitor and check.

2 Elicit the answers to the questions. The second question includes was for recognition. If students query it, just tell them it's the past of be, but do not go into a full presentation of was/were at this point.

WHEN WERE THEY BORN?

 

 

 

was/were born

1 T 9.3 Focus attention on the photos. Ask Who was he/she? about each of them to check the names. Check comprehension of Men were they born? Focus attention on the information about the people. Check comprehension of painter, scientist, and Poland. Tell students that they will hear a short description of each person and that they have to write the year they were born. Play the recording and get students to write the years. Check the answers with the class.

Answers and tapescript

Leonardo da Vinci was a painter and scientist. He was born in 1452 in Tuscany, Italy.

Marie Curie was a scientist. She was born in 1867 in Warsaw,

T 9.4

2Focus attention on the sentences. They present the I/he/she forms with was. Play the recording and get

students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage students to reproduce the weak form la/ in was.

3     Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Get students to ask you the questions and give the answers. Drill the language chorally and elicit a few exchanges in open pairs. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of am and was and correct pronunciation,

4     T 9.5 This exercise presents the you and they forms with were, the wh- question form, and also reviews datesPlay the recording and get students just to listen. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage students to reproduce the weak form /a/ in was and were, and the correct intonation and sentence stress:


My name's Calico. I know, i€s a funny name! I was born in 1987.

My two brothers are Henry and William, they were born . . . er


 

GRAMMAR SPOT

Focus attention on the table. Read out the present forms of to be and focus on the past examples was and were. Elicit the you form in the past (were), Then get students to complete the rest of the table.

Present Past

Read Grammar Reference 9.1 on p125 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it.

Get students to practise the questions and answers in open pairs and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct reading of dates, pronunciation, and intonation.

5Focus attention on the photo. Ask What's her name? (Calico Jones.) How old do you think she is? (Students guess age — about 15.) Draw a family tree on the board and review the following vocabulary: brother, sister, mum, dad, grandmother. Focus attention on the names of Calico's family. Read the names aloud so that students can recognize the pronunciation. Tell the students they are going to hear Calico describing her family. Ask When was Calico born? Play the recording as far as I was born in 1987 and elicit the answer. Play the next part of the recording as far as one year later in 1993. Elicit the answers about Henry and William (Henry — 1992, William — 1993). Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete their answers.

Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again if necessary to allow students to check/complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class.

Answers

Calico Jones

Calico's family

Henry and William

Cleo

Linda and Alan

Violet

. Henry in 1992 and William just one year later in 1993. Ugh — they're horrible! My little sister is Cleo, she's OK. She was born in 1999. Mum and dad are Linda and Alan. My mum was born in 1961 and my dad er. . . I think he was born in 1961, too. And my grandmother... er, she was born in 1930 something... yes, 1932. Her name's Violet. J think it's a beautiful name.

Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Highlight the uses of present and past forms. Ask the questions and get students to give complete answers (She was born in 1999. They're her parents. Linda was born in 1961. Alan was born in 1961, too.)

Drill the questions and answers chorally. Elicit some questions and answers about the other people in Calico's familv with students working in open pairs. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of is/are, was/were born, dates, pronunciation, and intonation.

T 9.6

6      Demonstrate the activity by writing the names of some of your family on the board, Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Elicit similar questions about your family from the class. Briefly review he/she if students have problems with this and make sure they use is and was correctly. Students work in closed pairs and ask and answer about their respective families. Encourage them to make brief notes of the dates when people were born in preparation for the next exercise. Monitor and check for correct use of is/are, was/were born, dates, pronunciation, and intonation.

7      This is a transfer activity to consolidate the third person singular form. Elicit information from several students about their partner's family.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 9

Exercises I and 2 Further practice of writing and understanding years.

Exercise 3 A listening exercise to review family vocabulary and years.

Exercises 4 and 5 Further practice of was/were born in positive and question forms.



1992, 1993

1999

1961

1932


9

PRACTICE SUGGESTION

You can give students further practice in was born and


Who were they?

I Pre-teach/check the words in the box, and India. Drill the pronunciation chorally and individually. Focus attention on the example. Get students to continue matching the people to the jobs in the box.

Answers

1     writer

8 politician

3 musician

2     painter

7 racing driver

4 actor

6 princess

T 9.7

2Tell the students they are going to hear when each Of the people in exercise I was born. Play the first sentence and elicit the answer ( 1564). Play the rest of the recording and get students to write the other years. Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again if necessary to allow students to check/complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class.

 Answers and tapescript

I Shakespeare was born in England in 1564, 2 Van Gogh was born in Holland in 1853.

3     Beethoven was born in Germany in 1770.

4     Marilyn Monroe was born in the US in 1926, 5 Elvis Presley was born in the US in 1935.

 6 Diana Spencer was born in England in 1961.

7 Ayrton Senna was born in Brazil in 1960.  8 Indira Gandhi was born in India in 1917.

T 9.8

3This exercise extends wh- question forms with was. Play the recording and get students just to listen. Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage students to reproduce the weak form /a/ in was and the correct intonation and sentence stress.

Get students to practise the questions and answers in open pairs and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and intonation.

Focus attention on the Caution Box.

I Make sure students understand that wasn't and weren't are contracted forms and what the corresponding full forms are.

2 Focus attention on the examples and read the full sentences aloud. Then read the positive and negative verb forms in isolation, emphasizing the change from the weak form la/ in was and were to the strong forms /D/ in wasn't and /3:/ in weren't. Drill the sentences and individual verb forms chorally and individually.

Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Ask the question about Van Gogh and elicit the answer (He was a painter.) Elicit the other questions with Where and When and get students to practise in open pairs. Students continue asking and answering in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct question formation and intonation, and for correct reading Of the dates.

9

dates with the photocopiable information gap activity on TB pl 13. Student A and Student B have six pictures of famous people from the past, but only information for three of those people. They have to ask questions to complete the information. Photocopy enough pages for your class. Pre-teach politician, dancer, and JamaicaDivide the class into pairs and hand out the copies, one for Student A and one for Student B. Elicit the questions students will need to ask: Who was number (I )? What was his/her job? When was he/she born? VThere was he born? Remind students to ask How do you spell that? when they don't know the spelling of the proper nouns. Demonstrate the activity by getting one pair of

students to ask about picture I (Einstein). Students then complete the task, working in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of was, reading of the dates, and use of the alphabet. Get students to compare their sheets to check they have exchanged the information correctly.

Negatives and pronunciation

4      This exercise introduces the negative forms and highlights the change in pronunciation of the vowel from positive to negative. It also highlights the need for contrastive stress when students correct information.

T 9.9

Focus attention on the examples. Remind students that the circles indicate the main stress of each sentence. Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage them to reproduce the correct sentence stress and strong vowel forms in wasn't and weren't.

5      Elicit the answer to number I as an example (No, he wasn't. He was a racing driver.) Remind students they will need a plural verb form in numbers 3 and 5. Students continue correcting the information working individually.

T 9.10

Play the recording and get students to check their answers.

Answers and tapescript

1    Ayrtm Senna was an actor.

No, he wasn't. He was a racing driver.

2    Marie Curie was a princess

            No,       wasnt. She wasa scientist.

3    Marilyn Monroe and Elvis Presley were Italian.

No, they weren't. They were American.

4    Beethoven was a scientist.

No, he wasn't. He was a musician.

5    Leonardo da Vinci and Van Gogh were musicians. No, they weren't. They were púters.

6    Indira Gandhi was a singer.

No, she wasnt. She was Prime Minister of India.

Play the recording again and get students to repeat. If students have problems, highlight the weak and strong verb forms in the Caution Box again and elicit where the main stress goes on each sentence. Then get students to repeat again. Get students to practise the sentences in pairs, Student A reading the first sentence and Student B the correction. Monitor and check for correct sentence stress and correct pronunciation of the past verb forms.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 9

Exercises 6 and 7 A gap-fill and guided writing task to consolidate was/were and was/were born.

Exercise 8 Further practice of was/were in questions, short answers, and positive forms.

Exercise 9 Further practice of was/were in positive and negative forms.

Exercise 10 Consolidation of was/were in all forms.

Today and yesterday

6 Pre-teach/check yesterday and briefly review the days of the week round the class. Briefly elicit other items that can fit in the table, e.g.

Today/Yesterday , ,

I'm/l was in town/at the shops/at the cinema/in the country/in the park the weather is/was good/all right/bad my parents are/were (see above examples) Demonstrate the activity by saying where you and your parents are today and were yesterday. Elicit an example of the days of the week and the weather and then get students to continue in closed pairs. This exercise can be extended also to practise the negative. Monitor and check for correct present and past verbs forms, and for correct pronunciation.

Check it

7 Elicit the answer to number I as an example (was). Students complete the Other sentences, working individually.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Get students to read the complete sentences out in order to get more pronunciation practice.

I Where was your mother born?

2         When were your parents born?

3         No, my parents weren't both born in 1951. My fatherwas      born in 1951, and my mother in 1953.

 4 Yes, I was in New York in 1999.

5    Was he at home yesterday? No, he wasn't,

6    Were you at work yesterday? Yes, we were.

7 Were they at school yesterday morning? No, they weren't.

VOCABULARY AND READING

p68)

Past Simple - irregular verbs

I This section introduces a small set of irregular past forms in a Story context. Students access the verbs through their knowledge of the •v;erbs in the Present Simple and the main focus is a lexical rather than grammatical one. It is therefore not advisable to go into a detailed presentation of the Past Simple at this stage. This is covered in Unit 10.

Check the meaning of present and past and review the meaning of the verbs in their present form. Demonstrate the activity by eliciting the past of is and are ( was and were). Refer students to the irregular verb list on p142.

T 9.11

Get students to match the verbs forms, working in pairs. Play the recording through once and get students to check their answers.

Answers and tapescript

were

is buybought               went say               said  saw take took

Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students aren't confused by the spelling of bought— /bo:t/. Say the present forms and get students to say the past equivalent round the class.


Refer students to Grammar Reference 9.2 on p 125.

9


2     Pre-teach the new vocabulary in the sentences: market, painting, expert (noun), be worth, million, franc, upset, dirty, for sale, using the pictures where appropriate.

Focus on the example to demonstrate the activity. Students continue matching the pictures and sentences, working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class.

    Answers

Id 2f 3a 4c 5e 6b

3     Tell students they are going to read a report of the story

about the painting. Focus attention on the example to demonstrate the activity. Tell students to complete the rest of the story, working individually. Encourage them not to worry if they Come across new words and to try to understand them from the context.

T 9.12 Get students to check in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers and tapescript

In August 1999 three friends, Jacques Proust, Guy Fadat, and

François Leclerc, were on holiday in the town of Laraque in France. On Sunday they went shopping in the market and they saw a dirty, old painting of the Virgin Mary. They bought it for 1,400 francs and they took it to Paris. In Paris, an expert     said that the painting was by Leonardo da Vinci and it was worth 500,000,000 francs. The man in Laraque market said: 'I was happy to sell the painting but now I'm very upset. I don't  want to think about it!'            

Check any vocabulary students had problems with. Students then read the story to a partner. Monitor and check for pronunciation. If students have problems, drill key sections and get students to repeat the task.

4 Get students to cover the text in exercise 3. Focus attention back on the pictures. You can either re-tell the story as a class activity first and then get students to repeat in pairs. Alternatively, set up the pairwork first and then re-tell as a class in a checking phase. Either way, when you monitor, don't expect students to reproduce the story with complete accuracy. Do not over-correct in the feedback stage — just pick up on common errors in the irregular past forms. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 9

Exercises 11 and 12 Further practice of irregular past simple forms.

9 •

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

 

When's your birthday?

I Focus attention on the months. Pre-teach calendar and elicit the second month of the year (February). Get students to continue writing the months in order on the calendar.

T 9.13

Play the recording and get students to check their answers.

Answers and tapescript

January, February, March, April, May, June, July, ¼ust,

 September, October, November, December.

Focus attention on the stress marks on each word. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Get students to say the months in order round the class. Check for accurate pronunciation and drill the months again if necessary.

2     Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Check comprehension of So is my birthday! Drill the language chorally and then get students to stand up and practise the language in a mingle activity. Get them to note down the months of other students' birthdays as they ask. Elicit the answers to the follow-up questions and establish which is the most common month for birthdays in your class.

3     This exercise presents ordinal numbers. Check students understand the difference between cardinal numbers and ordinal numbers with the following examples: There are seven days in a week and there are twelve months in a year.

The first day is Monday and the seventh day is Sunday.

The first month is January and the twelfth month is December. Get students to tell you the ordinal numbers (first, seventh, and twelfth).

Focus attention on the numbers and on how we form the abbreviations with the numeral and the last two letters of the ordinal number. Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Write the abbreviated numbers on the board in random order and elicit the ordinal from individual students.

4     Elicit the first ordinal as an example (sixteenth). Get students to say the other ordinal numbers, working in pairs. Monitor and check and note any common errors.

T 9,15

Play the recording and let students check their answers. If necessary, drill any ordinals students had problems with.

5     T 9.16 This exercise presents how we read dates English. Tell students they are going to hear eight dates and that they should write down the correct ordinal. Play the first date and focus on the example answer (thefirst ofJanuary). Play the rest of the dates and get students to complete the task.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers and tapeseript the first of January the thW of March the sevetth of April the twatid of May the second of June

the twelfth of August the              of November the Wrty-frst of December

O

Focus attention on the Caution Box and highlight the use of the and the ordinal in spoken dates and the use of the abbreviation, but not the in writing. If appropriate, point out that students may also see dates written as 3rd January, 10th March, etc.

Elicit the dates in exercise 5 orally and then get students to continue practising in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of the, correct ordinals, and pronunciation of the months.

6 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Get students to ask you the questions and give answers. Drill the language chorally and then get students to practise in open pairs. Students continue in groups. Monitor and check for correct falling intonation in the questions and for the correct use of prepositions — on + date and at + time. Tell the class again the date and time of your birth, following the example in the last speech bubble. Elicit more examples from the class.

SUGGESTION

You can give students regular practice in dates by asking What's today's date? at the beginning of every class, Encourage students to write the dates in full at the top of any written work, i.e. January 3rd 2002, rather than 3/1/02.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 9

Exercises 15 and 16 Consolidation of the months of the year.

Exercise 17 Consolidation of ordinal numbers.

Exercise 18 Consolidation of dates.

Exercise 19 Further practice of ordinål numbers.

Don't forget!

Workbook Unit 9

Exercise 13 In this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

Exercise 14 A review of the key lexical sets from

previous units.

Word list

Ask the students to turn to p 134 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.

9

Introduction to the unit

The title Of this unit is 'We had a good time!' and the overall theme is leisure and holidays. The unit follows on from Unit 9 with the introduction of all forms of the Past Simple with both regular and irregular verbs. Skills practice is provided with speaking, listening, and writing tasks.

The lexical set of sports and leisure is reviewed and extended. The Everyday English section focuses on filling in an application form.

10 • We had agoodtime!

Past Simple — regular and irregular

Questions and negatives

Sports and leisure • Filling in forms

We had a good time!

Language aims

Grammar — Past Simple regular and irregular; questions and negatives The set of irregular past forms from Unit 9 is extended and the regular forms are also introduced. The unit covers positive, negative, and question forms. Students' knowledge of the Present Simple usually helps them with the Past Simple, in that students are already familiar with the uses of the auxiliary do, and so will grasp how did functions. The past auxiliary is easier in that it is the same in all persons. It is important for students to see the contrast in the use of Present Simple and Past Simple and practice in using the two tenses in parallel is provided in the unit.

POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

      Although knowledge of the Present Simple helps students to access the Past Simple, students often make mistakes in the new tense. Common errors are:

      Did they watched TV?

      They no played tennis.

When you lived in the US?

      Irregular verbs need constant use and reviewing. Students often try to apply the regular -ed ending to irregular verbs, e.g. *I goed to the cinema.

Encourage students to refer to the irregular verb list on PI 42 and get students to review the verbs regularly for homework.

      There are different ways of pronouncing the -ed regular ending and students need help with this. There is a pronunciation focus on p72 highlighting the It/ and /d/ -ed endings, e.g. worked played /pleld/

Students often try to divide out the -ed ending in the pronunciation inappropriately, e.g.

watched /wotjed/ rather than /WDtft."

Monitor and check for this mistake, and also help students to perceive the different -ed endings, but do not insist that they produce the endings each time.

Vocabulary The lexical set of sports and leisure activities is reviewed and extended. Students focus on sports/activities collocations with go/play, e.g. go swimming, play hockey, etc.

Everyday English This section fOcuses on filling in an application form. The theme of leisure and sports is maintained with a form to join a sports centre.

Workbook Regular and irregular Past Simple verbs in the positive are reviewed and consolidated in a range of exercises.


            here is a Listening and writing section focusing on a day in rhe life of a character.

 Writing section gets students to talk about what they did âSt Saturday.

Past Simple questions and negatives are reviewed in a range of exercises.

here is further practice on the lexical set of sports and .eisure.

                    section gives further consolidation of

get students to tell you the infinitive of the irregular past forms. (If students query the regular -ed endings, tell them this is the ending for most verbs in the Past Simple, but do not go into a long explanation at this stage.)

 Play the first line of the recording as far as half past eleven and focus attention on the example. Play the recording through to the end and get students to tick the remaining verbs. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the Whole class.

short Reading negative and positive Past Simple forms.

                                                                                                                                   1        got late

There is further practice in filling in forms in the Everyday            2    Fed a big breakfast

English section.                                                                             3 ætt shopping

                                                                                                                                   4       stayed at home

Notes on the unit                                       5 bwght a newspaper

6            listened to music

7            watched TV

8

I This section reviews days and dates, Present and Past                        cooked a meal

Simple forms, and key time expressions. Focus attention 9 went to bed early on the questions and elicit the answers. Make sure students use is/was correctly, pronounce the daysI had a

was Sunday, so I got up late, eleven thirty.

     correctly, and use ordinal numbers and the in the dates.                                                                                     I

                                                                                                                                   big                orange juice, toast, eggs, and coffee. Then

 

 

film TV. In the evening cooked a meal                   me, not big

Elicit from students the fact that the other time

 

meal, just soup and a salad. I went to bed early. It was a

expressions are not possible and establish that this is because they refer to the past. Students then match the

 

lovely, lazy day.    

remaining lines and time expressions. Play the recording

2

Focus on the speech bubble and highlight the use of

and get students to check their answers.

 

Then to link a series of actions. Elicit from the class what

2 Focus attention on the sentences. Go through shopping, to the supermarket, and I bought some and ask Past or present? about each one, and also elicitand a Sunday newspaper, the Sunday Times In the which verb is used in each sentence. Demonstrate the afternoon I listened to music for a bit and then I watched a activity by eliciting the time expression for line I ( now). just for a

GRAMMAR SPOT

I Focus attention on the list of verbs and on the examples worked and played. Ask students to write the other past forms. Check the answers with the whole class.

Answers and tapescript watch      cook worked           watched cooked play                                                                      stay       listen played            stayed    listened

Explain that these are regular verbs and so are different from those students met in Unit 9. Elicit the last two letters in each of the verb forms: -ed.

Betsy did yesterday• Students then take it in turns to say

Answers and tapescriptwhat Betsy did, working in closed pairs. Monitor and

1 at school now.check for pronunciation of the -ed regular endings but 2 You were at home yesterday. do not overcorrect if students have problems during this 3 1 went to Australia in 1997. initial production stage.

4    She lives in London now.

5    TtEYboughttheir house in 1997. 6 ltwascoldand wet yesterday.

Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually.

Past Simple — regular and irregular

1 This section reviews and extends the irregular verbs students met in Unit 9 and also presents regular -ed forms. Focus attention on the photo and ask What's her name? (Betsy.) Where is she? (At home.) Tell students they are going to hear Betsy talking about what she did yesterday. Focus attention on the list of verbs and ask

Past or present? Check comprehension of each verb and

69

Establish that adding -ed is the rule for the formation of the Past Simple in the majority of verbs.

Pronounce the sounds /tf and /d/ and then play the recording. Get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students don't divide out the -ed ending into a syllable of its own, e.g. */kuked/. Encourage them to reproduce the It/ and /d/ endings accurately, but do not overdo this if students find it difficult. It is enough at this stage for them to perceive the difference.

2      Ask students to write the past tense of the verbs ending in [t/. Check the answers.

T 10.4

Pronounce the sound /ld/ and then play the recording. Get students to repeat chorally and individually, Elicit the difference between these verbs and the ones in exercise I: the -ed ending is pronounced fid].

Answers and tapeseript

/ld] visit want hate visited wanted hated

3      Read the sentence aloud. Check students understand there is no difference in the verb forms for different persons in the Past Simple. Contrast this with the third person -s in the Present Simple. Read Grammar Reference 10.1 on PI 25 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it.

T 10.6

Questions and negatives

4 T 10.5 This section presents the Past Simple question and negative forms. Focus attention on the photo. Ask What's her name? (Betsy.) and What's his name? ( Dam) Tell students they are going to hear Betsy and Dan talking about their weekend. Play the recording as far as tennis with some friends and elicit the verb for the first gap (played), Play the recording to the end and get students to complete the conversation. Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again if necessary. Check the answers with the whole class.

 Answers and tapescript

B Hi, Dan. Did you have a good weekend?

D Yes, I did, thanks.

B What did you do yesterday?

D Well, yesterday morning I got up early and [played with some friends.

B on Sunday!

                                                                                                                                      D I know, I know. I dontusually get up early on Sunday.                                                                                                                                                                                          

 B Did you go out yesterday afternoon?

D No, I didn't. I just stayed at home. I watched the football  on TV.

B Ugh, football! What did you do yesterday evening?

D Oh, I didn'tdomuch. I worked a bit at my didn't go to bed late. About 11.00.

5Focus attention on the first question in the conversation and elicit the answer (Did you have a good weekend?). Ask students to complete the rest of the conversation. Play the recording and get them to check


3 Refer students back to the list in exercise l. Get students to underline the things that they did yesterday. Demonstrate the activity by telling the class things that you did yesterday. If appropriate, write the sentences on the board and underline the verbs, e.g. I hgd a big

breakfast. Elicit a few more short examples from the class and then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of regular and

irregular past forms.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 10

Exercises 1—3 Further practice of Past Simple regular verbs.

Exercises 4 and 5 Further practice of Past Simple irregular verbs.

Exercises 6 and 7 Listening practice to review the Past Simple.

Exercise 8 Personalized writing practice.

10 •

6

7

their answers. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage falling intonation on the wh- questions.

Answers and tapescript

I b Did you have a good weekend?

D Yes, Idid.

2     B What did you do yesterday?

 D I played tennis.

3     B Did you go out yesterday afternoon? D No, I didnt.

4     B What did you do yesterday evening?

 D I didn't do much. I didn't go to bed late.

Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Drill the questions and answers chorally and individually. Elicit other questions and answers in open pairs.

T 10.7

Focus attention on the examples, and then get students to continue in closed pairs. Encourage accurate pronunciation of didn't. Monitor and check for correct formation of the negatives. A common error is the repetition of the positive past form after the auxiliary didn't— He didn't cooked a meal. If students have this problem, highlight the errors in a general feedback session, then refer students to the Grammar Spot.

GRAMMAR SPOT

I Read the notes on the formation of questions and negatives. Highlight the use of did and didn't and make sure students understand that didn't is the contracted form of did not.

T 10.7

Play the recording. Get students to repeat the sentences chorally and individually.

2 Read the notes on the difference between Present Simple and Past Simple. Highlight the use of do/did in the questions, Remind students that did is used for all persons in Past Simple questions. Highlight the use of doesn't/didn't in the negatives and remind students that the other present forms require don't. Ask students to underline the time expressions that are used with the different tenses (Present Simple: every morning, every Sunday; Past Simple: yesterday morning, last Sunday). Elicit other time expressions that can be used with the tenses, e.g. :

Present Simple: every day/week/month, on Sunday, at the weekend, on Saturday afternoon

Past Simple: last week/month/year/weekend, yesterday

Refer students to Grammar Reference 10.2 on pl 25.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 10

Exercise 9 Past Simple Yes/No questions and short answers.

Exercises 10 and 11 Past Simple wh- questions and answers. Exercise 12 Past Simple negatives.

PRACTICE (SBp74)

Did you have a good weekend?


I Exercises I, 2, and 3 focus on Yes/No questions in the Past Simple. Tell students they are going to talk about what they did last weekend. Focus attention on the list of activities in the chart and check comprehension of each one. Double-check comprehension of the difference between do homework and do housework. Students then continue to form the questions, working individually. Explain that there are three columns in the chart — one for each student, one for the teacher, and one for the student's partner. Get students to tick the activities they did last weekend in the You column.

2     Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Drill the question chorally and individually and then give vour answer. Get students to ask you the rest of the questions and record the answers in the Teacher column.

SUGGESTION

You can give students further practice in Past Simple wh- and Yes/No questions by using the photocopiable memory game on TB pl 14. This shows two flats, one for Student A and one for Student B, which show what the occupants did yesterday.

Photocopy enough sheets for your class. Preteach/check write a letter and irregular past wrote, read a book/newspaper and irregular past read /red/, have a bath, have a shower, and play the guitar/gr'ta:/.

Demonstrate the activity with two confident students. Get Student A to look carefully at the picture of Jane's flat for 30 seconds and then put it out of sight. Student B then uses the question cues to ask about what Jane did ýesterday. Pre-teach I can't remember. Get students to complete the task in closed pairs for Student A's picture. Students then change roles with Student B looking at Paul's flat for 30 seconds and Student A using the question cues to ask about what Paul did yesterday.

Monitor and check for correct question formation and use of regular and irregular pasts. (With a weaker class, you could put all the A and B students together in separate groups to give them time to write out the cues as full questions. Then divide the class into A and B pairs and continue as above.)

T 10.8

3     Demonstrate the activity in open pairs and then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct question formation and short answers.

Focus attention on the examples and then get students to tell the class about what they and their partner did last weekend.

4     This exercise focuses on wh- questions in the Past Simple. Briefly review the question words what, who, where, what time, and how much. Focus attention on the example.

Tell students thev are going to hear the questions on tape, each preceded bv a statement, Play the recording through once and get students to listen to the statements and check that they have formed the questions correctly. Play the recording again and elicit what the man says before each question.


Answers and tapescript A I wentto the cinema.

B What did you see?

2    A I went shopping.

B What did you buy?

3    A I had a meal in a restaurant, B What did you have?

4    A I saw my friends,

Who did you see?

5    A I played football.

           B Where did you play?

6    A lwenttoaparty.

B What time did you leave?

7    A I did my homework,

B How much homework did you do?

8    A I did the housework.

B How much housework did you do?

T 10.9

5Pre-teach/check meal, and steak and chips. Play the recording and get students to listen. Get students to practise the conversations in closed pairs. Monitor and check for pronunciation. If students have problems, drill key sections, and then get them to practise again in closed pairs.

Refer students back to exercises I and 4. Explain that

they are going to ask each other about the activities in question I again. If their partner answers 'Yes' about an activity, they should ask the appropriate follow-up question from exercise 4. If you think they need it,

demonstrate by building a model dialogue on the board.

Model conversation

A  Did you go shopping last weekend?

B  Yes, I did.

A What did you buy?

B  A new jumper.

A Was it expensive? B Yes, it was.

Get students to continue working in closed pairs. Monitor and check for the correct form Of Past Simple questions, short answers, and positive forms, and for the use of was/were.

6 This exercise reviews short answers in the Present and Past Simple. Pre-teach/check party and newspaper. Focus attention on the examples and then get students to complete the answers, working individually.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

10

Answers and tapescript Doyou work in New York?

Did she like the film?

Does he watch TV every evening?

Did you go out yesterday evening?

Did he go to the party?

Do you buy a newspaper every morning? Yes, Does she usually go to bed late? Did they have a good time?

Get students to practise the questions and answers in open and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for pronunciation. If students have problems, drill key sentences and then get students to practise again in closed pairs.

Check it

7 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

1 She bought an expensive car.

2 Did they go shopping yesterday? 3 Where did you go last weekend?

4    We didrft see our friends.

5    Didyou like the film? Yes, I did. 6 1 played tennis yesterday.

SUGGESTION

Take the opportunity to review the Past Simple by getting students to ask and answer about the weekend in the first lesson that you have each week This provides a useful review and also highlights the value of what students are learning in a realistic situation.

Sports and leisure

I Focus attention on the photographs. Elicit the activity that goes with photo I (swimming). Students continue to match the photos and activities. Check the answers with the whole class.

This section gives further practice of the Present Simple and Past Simple in the context of holidays. It also reviews the sports and leisure activities from the Vocabulary and speaking section. Revise the months of the year by

Check the pronunciation of the activities and drill if necessary.

2      This exercise focuses on collocations with play and go + -ing. Focus attention on the examples and then get students to complete the categorizing, working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class. As a general rule, you could tell students that sports with a ball and games like cards, chess, etc. take play, and physical activities ending in -ing take go.

3      This exercise practises Yes/No and wh- questions with the collocations from exercise 2. Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Highlight the use of the tenses — Present Simple to talk about general habits in the present and Past Simple to ask When? in the past. Drill the language chorally and individually. Elicit two or three more examples from students working in open pairs. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of tenses, correct use of play and go, and pronunciation.

4      This exercise practises the third person forms. Focus attention on the examples. Elicit more examples from students about their partner. Check for accurate use of the third person forms in the Present Simple. Highlight common errors and get students to correct them.

Elicit the seasons students have alreadv met — spring, summer, and autumn, and pre-teach winter. Get students to say the months that correspond to each season in their country, e.g. In England, Spring is March, April and May, Focus attention on the speech bubble and give an example about yourself. Elicit more examples from the class, and then get students to continue in pairs.

T 10.11

 

2Focus attention on the photos. Ask are they? ( Colin and Fran.) Focus attention on the list of information, A and B. Check students recognize that A is Present Simple and B is Past Simple. Focus attention on the examples. Tell students to listen and underline the correct information about Colin and Fran's holidavs. Make sure they understand that the information will come in slightly different order from the order on the page. Play the recording through once and get students to complete the task.

Get students to check their ans•sers in pairs. Plav the recording through again and get students to check/complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class.

73


       Answers                                                                                                            • Where do they usually eat? In restaurants.

 

 

          Where did they eat last year? They cooked        own      

    They usually.

    Last year they.

                              meals.

go in summer

went in winter

       What do they usually do? Go swimming and play golf.

go to Spain

went to Switzerland

What did they do last year? They went skiing and ice-

     stay in a hotel

   stayed in a chalet         

skating,

      eat in restaurants                           cooked their own meatsDo they usually have a good time? Yes, they do.

      go swimming              went skiing / ice-skating                                          Did they have a good time last year? Yes, they did.

play golf

played cards

have a good time

had a good time

WRITING

T 10.11

C Well, usually we go on holiday in summer.

My last holiday

F

Yes, and usually we go to Spain. but last year we.  

C

last year we went to Switzerland, and we went

I

This section reviews Past Simple negative and positive

 

in winter.

 

forms. Establish that this exercise is about Colin and

F

We stayed in a chalet and we cooked all our own meals

 

Fran's holiday last year and so students will need to use

 

there, It was lovely.

 

the Past Simple tense. Focus attention on the example

C

Yes, in Spain we usually stay in a hotel and eat in

 

and highlight the need for a negative form, then a

 

restaurants.

 

positive form. (With a weaker group, you might like to

F

It was good to do different things too. Usually we just go

 

elicit the verbs students will need to use before they start:

 

swimming and sit in the sun. ..

 

2 — go, 3 — Stay, 4 — eat/cook, 5 — go.) Get students to

C

And I sometimes play golf. I love that!

 

complete the sentences working individually.

T 10.12

 

skiing every day, and sometimes we went ice-skating in the afternoons - it was great fun.

checking against the tape.

             C

And in the evenings we cooked a meal and then played

Answers and tapescript

 

cards. We had a very good time.

I           year Colin and Fran          on holiday in summer.

and Past Simple. Focus attention on the speech bubbles.

 

They stayed in a chalet.

Drill the questions and answers encouraging students to

 

4 They didn't eat in restaurants.

reproduce the correct sentence stress:

 

They cooked their own meals. 5 They didn't go swimming.

When do they usually go on holiday?

 

They went skiing.

When did they go last year?

2

This exercise allows students to personalize the language

Elicit the questions and answers for the second prompt

 

of holidays and the Past Simple in a guided writing task-

in open pairs. ( Where do they usually go on holiday? To

 

Tell students they are going to write to a friend about

Spain. Where did they go last year? They went to

 

their last holiday. Ask Present or past? and establish that

Switzerland.) Remind students that the questions for the

 

students need to use the past tense. Focus attention on

last prompt are a different type ( Yes/No questions). Get

 

the model sentences and elicit what language can

students to ask and answer in closed pairs. Monitor and

 

complete the skeleton. Highlight the use of was in Was

check for correct question formation in both tenses, for

 

the weather good? and check students recognize this as

correct sentence stress, and for correct use of

 

the past of be.

prepositions to and in. Check the answers by getting

 

Téll the class about your own last holiday and then get

students to ask and answer in open pairs across the class.

 

students to write their description, using the skeleton in

Feed back on any common errors if necessary.

 

the Student's Book. Go round and help, correcting as necessary.

Answers

 

Get students to read their description to the class. If time

• Wheredothey usually go on holiday? To Spain.

 

is short, or if you have a very large class, get students to

Where did they go last year? They went to Switzerland.

 

read their descriptions in groups of four.

F Ah yes, you do. But of course in Switzerland we wentLet students check their answers in pairs before

Last              didn't go F We love holidays — we always have a good time inThey went in winter.

Spain too.2 They didn't go to Spain.

They went to Switzerland.

3 This exercise practises questions in the Present Simple                3 They didn't stay in a hotel.

• Where do they usually stay? In a hotel.

Where did they stay last year? They stayed in a chalet.

10


EVERYDAY ENGLISH

Filling in forms

NOTE

Students may need help with understanding the titles used with surnames in English:

Mr/Mrs/Ms/Miss, Be prepared to give a brief explanation of the titles.

Mr — used for men

Mrs— used for married women

Ms /tnz/ — used before a woman's surname when you do not know whether she is married or not, or when she prefers for this not to be known Miss — used for unmarried women

1     This section focuses on the language of forms and extends the overall unit theme of leisure. Focus attention on the form and ask What does Jennifer Cottrell want to do? (Join a sports centre.) What's the name Of the Sports Centre? ( Olympic.) Focus attention on the categories that applicants have to fill in. Check comprehension Of the titles Mr/Mrs/Miss/Ms, full name, postcode, date ofbirth, squash, athletics, fitness training, signature, type ofcard

(z card that applicant will be allocated), data input date date when applicant's details were processed).

2     Get students to complete the form with their own details. Go round and help as necessary.

3     Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Highlight the use of both to say students share interests, and the way of contradicting information with but I'm not. Also highlight the preposition in. Drill the language chorally and individually, encouraging students to reproduce the sentence stress correctly:

Georges and I are both interested in athletics.

Maria is interested in fitness training, but I'm not.

Divide the class into groups and give students time to compare their forms and decide who is interested in what. Elicit examples from the class of similarities and differences in interests.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 10

Exercise 16 Further practice of filling in forms as part of a listening task.

Don't forget!

Workbook Unit 10

Exercise 13 In this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

Exercise 15 Reading practice.

Word list

Ask the students to turn to p134 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.

Video

Episode 4 Surprise, surprise!

During a dull evening at home, Matt reveals that Jane's birthday is on Saturday— in two days' time. Helen, Matt, and David decide to give her a surprise partv. Thev buy all they need, and are getting everything readv in the kitchen, when Jane gets back to the house earlv. Matt tries to stall her in the hall. When she finally gets past him, we discover that Matt has yet again got the wrong idea — and misunderstood the date.

Stop and check 3 for Units 7—10 (TB PI 36

Progress test 2 for Units 6—10 ( TB pl 24

                                                            10                                                75

Introduction to the unit

The title of this unit is 'We can do it!' and it introduces can for ability. The positive, negative, and question forms are introduced and practised. The focus on can is extended to cover requests and offers. There is a Reading and vocabulary section with a text on the Internet, and a focus on verb and noun collocations. The Everyday English section focuses on basic problems.

can

can/can't • Requests and offers Verbs and nouns that go together What's the problem?

We can do it!

Language aims

Grammar — can/can't Can for ability is introduced in all forms. It is presented and practised with key verbs and the adverbs well and fast. There is also a pronunciation focus highlighting the different sounds in can/can't. Students are given both receptive and productive practice in the different forms.

POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

After having practised the Present Simple, students can sometimes want to use the auxiliaries do/does and don't/doesn't to form negatives and questions with can: * We don't can run fast.

* Do you can swim?

The pronunciation of can/can't needs careful presentation and practice. Students often have problems with the different vowel sounds (weak form la/ and strong form /æ/ in can, and /a:/ in can't). Students can also have problems distinguishing positive from negative forms, as the final t in can't is often not fully pronounced. 1 can swim. /ar kan swrm/

     Can you swim?          /kan ju: swm/

     Yes, I can.                 /jes al kæn/

      I can't swim.             /ar ka:nt swim/

The pronunciation is highlighted as part Of the Grammar Spot and students are given both receptive and productive practice.

Requests and Offers Requests and offers with can are presented and practised.

Vocabulary There is a focus on key noun—verb collocations as an introduction to a text about what you can do on the Internet.

Everyday English The language associated with describing and solving basic problems is introduced and practised.

Workbook The vocabulary and collocations syllabus is extended with a focus on activities. Vocabulary from previous units is also reviewed in an sodd one out' exercise.

can/can'tis consolidated in a range of exercises.

A listening exercise gives further practice of have and can.

There is a pronunciation exercise on can-

Requests and offers with can are further practised.

The Everyday English focus on problems is consolidated.

Notes on the unit

NOTE

In New Headway, we have chosen to spell email without a hyphen. Students may have seen the hyphenated form e-mail and both are acceptable in current usage.

I This Starter section focuses on possible uses of a computer and provides a useful introduction to the overall topic of computing and the Internet, Pre-teach/ check the language in the list of questions. Drill the pronunciation as necessary.

2 Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles.

Highlight the contrastive stress in the first speech bubble (don't, home, use, work). Check that students understand what it refers back to in the second sentence of the second speech bubble (a computer). Give an example of how you use a computer.

Elicit one or two more examples from the students and then get them to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check.

Elicit a few more examples in a short class feedback session.

WHAT CAN THEY DO?

 

 

can/can't

1     This section presents different people and their skills and so highlights the use of the positive form con. It also reviews the use of Wan with jobs/ roles.

Focus attention on the photos and on the example. Students continue matching the words and photos, working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class.

2     Pre-teach/check run fast, draw well, drive a tractor, and make cakes, using the information in the photos. Focus attention on the example, highlighting the use of a.

T 1 1 .1

Students complete the rest of the sentences with a or an. Play the recording and let students check their answers.

     Answers and tapescript      

1                        isa schoolboy. He can use a computer.

2                        is ut athlete. She can run fast.

3                        Lucy is anaråtect. She can draw well.

4                        Ted is an interpreter. He can speak French and German.

5                        Archie is a farmer. He can drive a tractor.

6                        Mabel is a grandmother. She can make cakes.

Play the recording again line by line and get students to repeat. Encourage them to reproduce the weak form in the positive form Of can /kan/. If students find this hard, get them to highlight the main stresses in each sentence and then practise the sentences again. Students practise in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation of can.

3     FOcus attention on the language in the speech bubble. Drill the example chorally and individually. Give another example about yourself and elicit one or two more examples from the class. Students then continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use and pronunciation of can. Do not overdo the practise of the weak form [kan/, as students will have the opportunity to review this in contrast with the other forms at various points in the unit.

Questions and negatives

T 11 .2

4This section presents the question and negative forms. Play the recording through once and get students to just listen, Play the recording again and get students to repeat the questions and answers. Encourage them to reproduce the weak form /kan/ in the question, the strong form /kæn/ in the positive short answer, and the negative form /ka:nt/. Get students to ask and answer in open pairs across the class. Students then continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation of the different forms of can. If students have severe problems with the pronunciation, drill the sentences again, but do not make students self-conscious about using the new language.

5 Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles.

SPOT

I Read the notes with the whole class. Highlight that can/can'tis used with all persons, and that can't is the contraction of can not.

2      Read the notes with the whole class. Highlight the use of can in the positive and question forms.

3      Tell students they are going to hear the three ways of pronouncing can. Play the recording and get

Highlight the use of can for both the she and the I forms. Drill the examples in open pairs. Elicit some more examples about the people in exercise I, and also some student—student examples. Students then continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use and pronunciation of can and can't.


Il               


students to just listen. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually.

Read Grammar Reference 11.1 on p126 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home.

Encourage them to ask you questions about it.

T 11.4

6Focus attention on the photo. Ask What's his name? Does he have a job? (Josh. No, he's a schoolboy.) Ask What's her name? (Tessa.) Pre-teach/check a bit, planes, cook (verb) and grandma. Play the recording through once and get students to fill in the gaps. Ask them to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again and get students to check/complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class.

Answers and tapescript

T Can you use a computer, Josh?

J Yes, of course I can. All my friends can. I use a computer at school and at home,

T Thaes very good. What other things can you do?

J Well, I can run fast, very fast, and I can draw a bit. I can draw planes and cars very well but I cant drive a car of course. When I'm big I want to be a farmer and drive a tractor.

T And I know you can speak French.

J Yes, I can. I can speak French very well because my dads French. We sometimes speak French at home.

T Can you speak any other languages?

J No, I can't. I can't speak German or Spanish, just French — and English of course! And I can cook! I can make cakes. My grandma makes lovely cakes and I sometimes help her. Yesterday we made a big chocolate cake.

Get students to practise the conversation in closed pairs. Monitor and check. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversation and get students to practise again in closed pairs.

7 Elicit the answer to question I as an example (He can use a computer, run fast, draw planes and cars, speak French and English, cook, and make cakes.) Students continue asking and answering in closed pairs.

Check the answers by getting students to read the questions and answers across the class.

 Answers

I He can use a computer, run fast, draw planes and cars, speak French and English, cook, and make cakes.

2     He can't drive, or speak German or Spanish.

3     Yes, he does,      

4     He wants to be a farmer.

5     He can speak French well because his dad is French.

6     He made a chocolate cake with his grandma.

                   •         can

SUGGESTION

You could ask students to practise similar conversations to the one in exercise 6 by getting them to role play the other people in the photos in exercise l. Students can imagine the skills for their character and then ask and answer, using the conversation in exercise 6 as a model.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit I I

Exercise I A vocabulary exercise on activities including some verb—noun collocations.

Exercises 2 and 3 Further practice of can/can't.

Exercises 4 and 5 Questions and answers with can.

PRACTICE

Pronunciation

1     T 11.5 This is a discrimination exercise to practise recogmzing and producing can and can't. Play sentence I as an example and elicit the answer (con). Play the rest of the sentences, pausing at the end of each one and get students to underline the correct word.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers and tapescript I can use a computer.

2     She can't speak German.

3     He can speak English very well.

 4 Why can't you come to my party?

5     We can't understand our teacher.

6     They can read music.

7     Can we have an ice-cream? 8 Can't cats swim?

Play the recording again line by line and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Students then practise the sentences in closed pairs, Monitor and check for correct pronunciation of can/can't, but don't insist on perfect pronunciation from all students.

Can you or can't you?

2 Focus attention on the chart. Check comprehension of the verbs in the list. Tell students that they will get the

answers for Tito on tape, they will complete the You column, the teacher will give answers for the Tcolumn, and another student for the S column.

T 11.6

Focus attention on the photo. Ask What's his name? ( Tito). Tell students they are going to hear Tito in

the recording and that they should tick the things he can do in his column of the table. Play the recording as far as French, German, and English. Focus attention on the example, and elicit the next verb that requires a tiCk speak French). Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete their answers.

Play the recording and get students to check their answers before checking with the whole class.

speak French speak English very well drive a car ride a horse play the guitar

T 11.6

I come from South America, from Argentina, but now I live and work in England, in London. I can speak four languages — Spanish, of course, French, German, and English. I can speak English very well now in the beginning it was very difficult for me. I can drive a car and I can ride a horse — I dont ride in London but when I'm back home in Argentina I ride. I can't ski and I can't cook very well and I can't play the piano — but I can play the guitar,

3     Students complete the You column in the chart- Drill the pronunciation of the verbs in the list if necessary and then elicit the questions from the class. Give true answers for yourself and get students to complete the T column.

Then focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles. Drill the language chorally and individually. Elicit two or three more examples In open pairs. Then get students to continue asking and answering in closed pairs, noting their partner's answer to each question in the S column.

4     Focus attention on the example in the speech bubble. Drill the language and highlight the different pronunciation of can and can't and the contrastive stress in the second sentence:

Isabel and I can speak French.

/a:/

She can speak Spanish too, but I can't.

Elicit two or three more examples from the class and then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for the correct use and pronunciation of can/can't. Feed back on any major common errors, but do not expect students to produce perfect pronunciation of can/can't as this may prove demoralizing.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit Il

Exercise 6 A listening exercise to consolidate have and can/can'r.

Exercises 7 and 8 Exercises to consolidate the pronunciation

Requests and offers

5     Focus attention on the example. Then get students to write the other questions, working individually, Get students to check their answers in pairs but don't check with the whole class until after exercise 6.

T 11.7

                      below,

6     Elicit the answer to question I (c It's about three thirty.) Students continue matching, working individually.

T 11.7

Play the recording and let students check their

answers to the question formation and the matching phase.

T 11.7

 Can you tell me the time, please?

It's about three thirty.

2 Can you speak more slowly, please?

I sorry. Can you understand now?  Can you come to my party?

rm sorry. I can't. Ifs my grandma's birthday.

4    Can I help you?

Yes, please. I want to buy this postcard.

5    Can I have a cold drink, please?

Yes, of course. Do you want Coca-Cola or orange juice?

Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Highlight how the conversation can be continued. Get students to practise the conversation in open pairs. Get students to continue with the other conversations in closed pairs. Remind them to continue the conversations in an appropriate way. With a weaker class, you could get students to repeat after the tape, and also elicit ways of continuing the conversations before students start the pairwork. possible ways of continuing the conversations:

2      Yes, I can. Thanks.

3      Say • Happy Birthday' from me.

OK. Thanks.

4      That's 90p please.

Thank you.

5      Orange juice, please.

Here you are.

Thanks.

Check it

7 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence,

of can/can't.

11

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers

I I can't understand.

2 He can speak three languages.

3 What can you see?

4 Can you swim fast?

5 'Can they come to the party? 'No, they cant.'  6 Can she play tennis?

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 11

Exercises 9 and 10 Further practice of requests and offers.

READING AND LISTENING p84)

The things you can do on the Internet!

NOTE

The reading text in this section contains a number of new lexical items and some topic-specific lexis, e.g. computer network, the Net, go worldwide. In order to save time in class, you might like to ask students to look up the following words in their dictionary for homework before the reading lesson: history, start (verb), Department ofDefense (US spelling), computer network, military (noun), telephone company, communicate, the Net, go worldwide, north, south, partner (in a game), list, endless.

1     This section gives practice in vocabulary, reading, and listening based on a subject of interest to many students — the Internet. The first exercise reviews and extends useful verb—noun collocations and also pre-teaches some of the vocabulary used in the reading text.

Pre-teach/check chat to, book (verb), and chess. Focus attention on the example. Students continue matching, working individually. Get students to check in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers  listen to a CDread a magazine watch a video            chat to a friend play chessbook a hotel

2     Focus attention on the website addresses and elicit where you can find them (on the Internet). Elicit what awww' means — world wide web.

3     Read the questions through as a class and elicit possible answers. Focus attention on the example in the speech bubble. Divide the class into pairs or groups of three and get students to discuss the questions. Allow them to use whatever language they can to express their ideas, but be prepared to feed in language if students request it. Do not feed back on the questions at this stage as students will find answers to the questions in the reading text.

Wecan

T 11.8

4If you haven't set the vocabulary checking as homework pre-teach/check the items listed in the Note opposite. Ask students to read and listen to the text and to find the answers to the questions in exercise 3. Get

students to compare their predictions in exercise 3 with the information in the text. Check the answers with the whole class.

I The Internet started in the 1960s.

2     It started because the US Department of DefM)se wanted a computer network to help the American military.

3     You can buy a car or house; you can book a holiday: you can watch a video; you can read an Australian  or a Japanese magazine; you can buy books and CDS North and South America, you can play chess with a partner in Moscow; you can chat to people from all over the world.

Elicit any other uses of the Internet that the students thought of in exercise 3 and that don't appear in the text.

5     Get students to read the text again and find and correct the false sentences, Ask students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class,

I The Internet started in the 1960s.

2 The US Department of Defense started it

6     Give the names of a few good websites that you know and describe what you can do at these sites. Feed in useful language for talking about websites:

(Name of site) is good for (shopping).

I visit (name of site) for (information on travel).

You can (read the news) at (name of site). A good site for (games) is (name of site).

Divide the class into groups and get them to talk about good websites that they know. Monitor and check. Get students to tell the whole class of any interesting sites in a brief feedback session. Highlight any common errors to the class, but do not over-correct as this may prove demoralizing.

T 11.9

7Tell students they are going to hear different people talking about when and why they use the Internet. Play the first extract and focus attention on the example. Play the rest of the recording and get students to note down their answers in the chart.

Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again and get students to check/complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class.

I Flew

I ttæ Internet a lot. Every day, I think. It helps me with my homework. It helps me with everything. Yesterday I did an English test It was quite difficult.

2 Anp

My brothds in Japan. I can't phone Japan, i€s very expensive — so Paul (thats my brother) and me — we 'tal? in chat rooms on              We talk late, at about Il dclock in the

— well, its evening here, but its eight o'clock in the mornng in Japan.

3 Tito

I play the guitar and I can find lots of songs on the Internet. Yesterday I got the words and music for Can't buy me love, you know, by the Beatles. I can play it now. I use the Internet at weekends because ifs cheap then.

4

Welt, my familYs name is and I want to write about my family, so every day I chat to people from all over the world, Canada, Germany, Argentina — people who have the name Krum They send me information about their families. les really nteresting. 5 To—y

I play games. And I go to chat rooms. And I go on websites for my favourite pop groups and football players. I want to be on the web all the time, but my mum says I cant. She says I can only use it after school for an hour, and then I stop.

6

I go shopping on the Internet. Every Friday I go to my son's house and I use his computer. les fantastic — the supermarket brirv all my shopping to my home.

SUGGESTION

You can review and extend the verb—noun collocations from the Reading and listening section with the photocopiable activity on TB p 115. Photocopy enough pages for your students to work in pairs. The page is divided into two sections — a matching activity and a gap-fill to practise the collocations. Divide the page along the cut lines, cutting out the verbs in the heading strip and each square which contains a noun. Divide the bottom half of the page so that you have two separate gap-fills, Keep each set of verbs and nouns and the gap-fills separate. Divide the class into pairs.

 

Give each pair a set of verbs and nouns. Explain that they have to match the nouns and verbs. Elicit an example, e.g. listen to music. If appropriate, you could do the activity as a competition with the fastest students to match the nouns and verbs as the winners. When students have finished matching, check the answers with the whole class.

(Note: these answers are based on the collocations that are presented in the Studenes Book. Other combinations may be possible, e.g. read*he news, and accept these at the checking phase.) listen to: music, a CD, a cassette, the news play: the piano, chess, basketball, cards, computer games, the guitar, tennis book: a hotel, a room, a table, a holiday, a ticket watch: TV, a video, the news, a film read: a newspaper, a magazine, a book, music, a letter

Hand out a copy of the gap-fill to each student. Preteach/check show (verb). Focus attention on the example and then get students to complete the conversation, working individually. Check the answers with the whole class.

1     watched       4 listen to

2     booked         5 read

3     play          6 book

Get students to practise the conversation in closed pairs.

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

 

 

 

Wha€s the problem?

I Focus attention on the problems and check students understand them. Pre-teach/check the following words from the conversations as you elicit from the class which problem goes with which photo: airport, push a button, borrow, What's the matter, perhaps, it doesn't matter, flowers.

2     Elicit the sentence to complete conversation I (I can't find my passport.) Students complete the other conversations, working individually. Get students to check their answers in pairs,

T 11.10

Play the recording and get students to check against the tape.

11


Answers and tapescript

I A Come on! Ifs timetogotothe airport.

B But I can't find my passport.

A You put itinyour bag.

B  Did l? Oh, yes, Here it is! Phew!

2 A Excuse me!

B Yes?

A This ticket machine doesn't work. I put in two pounds, but I didnt get a ticket.

B  Did you push this button?

A  Oh! No, I didn't.

B  Ah, well. Here you are.

A Thank you very much.

3     A Excuse me.

            B Yes?                                                                                    

A Can you help me? I'm lost.

B  Where do you wantto go?

A  To therailway station,

B  Go straight on. About two hundred metres les on your left

4     A I don't understand this word.

B Check it in your dictionary.

A My dictionarys at home. Can I borrow yours? B OK. No problem, Here you are, Oh no! B What's the matter?

A   The broken.

B   Good! Perhaps we can talk this evening.

A   But I want to watch a film.

B    Go to the cinema, then.

I'm really sorry. I forgot your birthday B It doesn't matter.

A It was on the tenth, wasn't it?

B Yes, it was.

A  Well, here are some flowers.

B   Oh, thank you very much. They're beautiful.

3 Get students to practise the conversations in closed pairs. Monitor and check for pronunciation. If students have problems, drill key sections from the tape and get students to repeat the pair-work

Get students to choose two conversations to learn and act out for the rest of the class. Encourage them to stand up and role play the situation, rather than just say the conversations face to face. This helps students with the acting out and with the overall delivery. Encourage the other students to listen carefully to the students who are acting and give feedback on pronunciation.

SUGGESTION

If class time is short, you could get students to learn their lines for homework and then give them a short time to rehearse in pairs. With a weaker group, you could put simple cues on the board to help if students forget their lines,

11 We can

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 11

Exercise 13 Further practice of talking about and solving problems.

Don't forget!

Workbook Unit Il

Exercise I I [n this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

Exercise 12 An 'odd one out' exercise to review word groups from previous units.

Word list

Ask the students to turn to PI 35 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.       


Introduction to the unit

This unit is called 'Thank you very much!' and it focuses on the function of asking for things in a range of contexts. The structures want and would like are practised and the difference in register is highlighted. Like is also reviewed and contrasted with would like- The lexical set of shops and amenities is reviewed and extended, and there is a vocabulary and speaking section on food and drink, and ordering in a restaurant. The Reading section also focuses on food with a text on junk food, There is further functional practice in the Everyday English section with the language used when going shopping.

Language aims

Grammar — want and would like Students have already met want as part of their practice of the Present Simple. In this unit, want + noun and want + toinfinitive are reviewed and practised. Would like + noun and would like + toinfinitive are also introduced as more polite ways of asking for things, or saying

that you want to do something. The question form Would you like .      ? is also introduced for offering things.

POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

Students have already seen like as a main verb in the presentation of the Present Simple in Unit 5, This is the first time students have seen would like and it is easy for students to confuse the two. Common mistakes are:

Do you like a cup of tea? * I like to buy a dictionary.

* You like a coffee?

Students can usually understand the difference between liking in general (expressed with like) and a specific request (expressed with would like) but the similarity in form can lead to confusion. Students are given both receptive and productive practice in both forms, but be prepared to monitor and check for mistakes and review as necessarv- ( There is no need to highlight at this Stage that would is a modal verb, as students will meet would and its various uses in later levels of New Headway.)

Vocabulary Shops and amenities are reviewed and extended. The lexical set of food and drink is practised in the context of ordering things in a restaurant. The food and drink theme is carried through in the Reading section with a text on an elderly lady who only eats junk food!

Everyday English This highlights and practises the language used when shopping in a range of situational conversations.

Workbook Would like is reviewed and consolidated in a range of exercises,

There is a pronunciation exercise to practise discrimination Ill vowel sounds. The lexical set of food and drink and the function Of ordering things in a restaurant are consolidated in a range of exercises.

Further reading practice is given with a series of short texts on eating habits. The language of shopping from the Everyday English section is further practised.

12

Notes on the unit

This Starter section reviews and extends the lexical set of shops and amenities and also reviews can.

I Focus attention on the example and then get students to con tinue matching in pairs.

2 Get students to make sentences with the phrases in exercise I using You can

T 12.1

Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Explain any individual words that students query. (If you think students need further practice in the pronunciation of can, you could get students to listen and repeat the sentences,)

Answers and tapescript

You can buy stamps in a post office,

You can buy a dictionary in a book shop.

You can buy a computer magazine in a newsagent.

You can change money in a bank.

 You can buy a CD in a music shop.

You can get a cup Of coffee in a café.

You can send an email in an Internet café.

want and would like

I Focus attention on the shopping list and check comprehension of the items. Highlight the use of want + noun and want + to-infinitive in the examples and drill the sentences. Check students' pronunciation of wants /wonts/. Check the pronunciation of the other items in the list. Students make sentences with the other items in the list, working in pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of third person -son wants.

Check the answers with the whole class by getting students to say the sentences aloud.

Answers

He wants Gary Alrigh€s new CD.

He wants to send an email to Rosa in the US, He wants a Spanish/English dictionary.

He wants a PC Worldwide computer magazine.

2 This exercise introduces would like in different situations. Pre-teach/check change (noun) in conversation 1. Make sure students understand that this is a noun form and contrast it with the verb form in change my money. Also pre-teach/check black or white coffee in conversation 2, and minidictionary in conversation 3. Highlight the use of I'd like and Would you like in the example answers in conversations I and 2, but do not go into a full grammatical explanation, as this is covered in the Grammar Spot.

T 12.2

Ask students to read and listen to Enrique and complete the conversations from the tape. Play the recording through once. With a weaker group, you may need to play the recording through again. Check the answers with the whole class. (If students query the use of one in conversation 3, check they understand it stands for dictionary, but do not go into a full explanation of the use of one/ones at this stage.)

Answers and tapescript

E Good morning. I'd like a stamp  Venezuela, please.

A That 79.

E Thank you.

A Here you are, and 25pchange.

E Thanks a lot. Bye.

2 E rd like a cup of coffee, please.

B Would you tike black or white?

E Black, please.

B All right. Here you are. One pound twenty, please

3 E Hello. I'd like to buy a Spanish/Engtish dictiΕary. C OK minidictionary?

E Just a minidictionary, please.

C This one is £4.99.

E That fine. Thank you very much.

T 12.3

3Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Play the recording, pausing at the end of each sentence, and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage them to reproduce I'd like correctly and make sure students don't say I like. Also encourage accurate intonation:

Would you like black or white?

Would you like a big dictionary or a minidictionary?

Get students to practise the conversations In exercise 2 In closed pairs. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversations and get students to practise again in closed pairs.

I Read the notes as a class. Make sure students understand the difference in register between want and would like, and that 'd like is the contracted form. Focus attention on the examples and highlight the use of the noun and to-infinitive with would like.

2 Read the notes as a class. Make sure students understand that Would you like ? is used when we


offer things. Focus attention on the examples and highlight the use of the noun and to-infinitive in questions with would like.

Read Grammar Reference 12.1 on PI 26 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home.

Encourage them to ask you questions about it.

T 12.4

4This exercise gives further practice of would like in different situations. Explain that students are going to hear Enrique from exercise 2 in different places in town. Check comprehension of the places in the list by asking What can you do/buy in a (newsagent)? Play the first conversation and elicit the correct place from the list (a music shop). Get students to write number I in the correct box. Play the rest of the recording and get students to number the other boxes.

Ask students to check their answers in pairs. If there is disagreement, play the recording again and get students to check/amend their answers. Check the answers with

E Thank you very much.

2   E rd like to send an email, please.

B Take PC number ten.

E Thanks a lot.

3   E Hello. rd like thjsmonth3 PC Worldwide magazine,

C Here you are. Thaes £2.20, please.

E Thank you very much. Bye.

4   E TwoticketsforJames Bond, please.

D Eight pounds forty, please.

E  Thanks. What time does the film start?

D Seven thirty.

E Thanks very much.

Good afternoon. Can I help you?

E  Yes, please. I'd like to change some travelle/s cheques,

F  Certainly. Are they in American dollars?

E Yes, they are.

F Fine Thaes £115 and 25p.

E Thank yw very much.

 

SUGGESTION

If appropriate, you could ask students what were the key words which gave them the correct answer, e.g. conversation 1 — CD, conversation 2 — send an email, conversation 3 — this month's PC Worldwide magazine, conversation 4 — James Bond, film, conversation 5 — traveller's cheques, American dollars. )

Refer students to the tapescript on pl 19. Get students to practise conversation I in open pairs. Students continue practising in closed pairs. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversations and get students to practise again in closed pairs.

PRACTICE

What would you like?

I This exercise practises question forms with would like. Focus attention on the picture and get students to imagine they are at home with a friend. Check comprehension offeel at home, Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Remind students of the use of would like + noun and would like + to-infinitive. Drill the examples chorally and individuallv. Encourage students to reproduce correct intonation — rising intonation on the Yes/No questions and falling on the wh- question, and a wide voice range on the answers, starting 'high'.

Check comprehension of the food, drinks, and activities on Offer. (If students query the use Of some in some cake, explain that we use it when we don't know exactlv how much of something is being referred to. Do not go into a full explanation of some versus any at this stage.) Elicit two or three different exchanges from the students in open pairs, Then get them to continue in closed pairs, Monitor and check for correct use of would you like + noun and to-infinitive, and pronunciation.

It's my birthday!

2 Tell students they are going to hear three people talking about their birthday. Focus attention on the table and

elicit possible answers to the two questions, e.g.

What would she/he like? a book, a CD, a picture, a jumper, a camera, etc.

What would she/he like to do in the evening? go to the theatre, have a party, go to a restaurant, go shopping, etc.

T 12.5 Play the recording of Suzanne and elicit the answers (breakfast in bed and to go to the theatre). Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete the chart.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

What wouldWhat would she/he like to she/he like?do in the evening? breakfast in bedto go to the theatre a new computerto go to a good restaurant a mobile phoneto go out with her friends

What would I like for my birthday? Tha€s easy. I'd like to haye breakfast in bed. With the newspapers. And in the evening I'd like to go to the theatre.

      Tom                                                                                            

Well, Id like a new computer, because my computer is so old that the new programs don't work on it. And then in the evening, I'd like to go to a good restaurant. I don't mind if ift Italian, French, Chinese, or Indian. Just good food.

      Alice                                       

I don't have a mobile phone, and all my friends have one, so what I'd really like is my own mobile. They arerft expensive  these days, And in the evening, I'd like to go out with all my friends and have a great time!

3     Ask students to imagine it's their birthday soon. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Drill the language and check students say I'd like rather than I like. Get students to give one or two more examples, working in open pairs. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of would like + noun and would like + to-infinitive,

Talking about you

4     Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Review the difference between like and would like by asking General or specific? about each sentence (like = general meaning; would like = a specific wish). Also highlight the use of like-F -ingand would like + toinfinitive. Drill the examples in the speech bubbles. Elicit open question and answer exchanges to the questions about travelling and living in another country. Then get students to continue working in closed pairs, asking and answering all the questions in the list. Monitor and check for correct use Of like + -ingand would like + toinfinitive. Feed back on any common errors which might interfere with comprehension, e.g. 1 like to learning French.

I Read the notes as a class. Make sure students understand that like is used to talk about something which is always true. Focus attention on the example sentences and elicit other examples from the class.

2 Read the notes as a class. Make sure students understand that 'd like is used to talk about

something we wish to have or do now or in the future. Focus attention on the example sentences and

elicit other examples from the class.

Read Grammar Reference 12.2 on p126 together in class and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. Draw students' attention to the difference between would like and want in Grammar Reference 12.3 on p126.

Listening and pronunciation

T 12.6

5This is a discrimination exercise to help students distinguish like and would like. Play the first sentence as an example and elicit the sentence that is recorded

( Would you like a Coke?) Play the rest of the recording

and get students to choose the correct sentence. Get students to check in pairs. If there is disagreement on the answers, play the recording again and then check the answers with the class.

Answers and tapescript I Would you like a Coke?

2    1 like orange juice.

3    Wd liketogoforawalk.

4    What do you like doing at the weekend? 5 We like our new car.

If students need more practice in pronunciation of like and would like, drill the sentences chorally and individually. Then get students to repeat the task sitting back to back — Student A should say a sentence and Student B should say if it is sentence I or 2.

Check it

6 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 12

Exercises 1—3 Further practice of would like in a range of exercises.


VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING

In a restaurant

I This section reviews and extends the lexical set of food and drink, and recycles would like and can in the context of ordering in a restaurant. Focus attention on the words and photos. Elicit the answer for number I (cheese). Students continue matching, working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class.

T 12.7

Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Check students can reproduce the word stress on the following words:

I water vegetables

tomato

Answers and tapescript

1 cheese

2 fish

3      fruit

4      salad

5      vegetables

6      chicken

7      soup

8      tomato

9      fries

10  mtneral water

2 Pre-teach/check the main headings in the menu — Joe's diner, To start, Burgers, Meat, Side orders, and Desserts.

There are two ways to approach the rest of this exercise — you can either put the students into groups and get them to complete as much of the menu as they can.

Alternatively, you can pre-teach the words in the list and then get students to complete the menu. Whichever way you choose, check the pronunciation of the food and drink items when students give the answers.

seafood cocktail, tomato soup hamburger, salad and fries, cheeseburger, salad and fries

Smdwiåes ham, chicken, cheese steak and fries, roast ehieken and salad fries, mixed salad ice-cream, chocolate cake, apple pie and cream wine, orange juice, beer, mineral water

T 12.8

3Tell students they are going to hear Renate and Paul ordering a meal. Check they understand that Renate is a woman's name and Paul a man's name. Also check what the letters W, R, and P stand for. Give students time

4

5

to read through the sentences. Check comprehension of How would you like it cooked? Focus attention on the example and play the first line of the recording. Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete the task.

Ask students to check their answers in pairs. If there is disagreement on the answers, play the recording again and get students to check/amend their answers, Check the answers with the whole class.

Answers

P Renate, what would you like to start?

R Can Ihavethetomatosoup, please? P And rd like the seafood cocktail. p Can I have the steak, please? W How would you like it cooked?

W What would you like to drink?

R And we'd like a bottle of minerat water, too. R Delicious, thank you.

T 12.8

W Are you ready to order?        

P Yes, we are. Renate, what would you like to start?

R Can I have the tomato soup, please?

P And I'd like the seafood cocktail.

W And for your main course?

R I would like the er roast chicken, please.

W Certainly. And for you?

P Can I have the steak, please?

W How would you like it cooked? P Medium.

W What would you like to drink?

P Can we have a bottle of red wine, please?

W Very good.     

R And we'd like a bottle of mineral water, too.

W Thank you very much. (Pause)

W Is everything all right? R Delicious, thank you.

Refer students to the tapescript on pl 19. Check comprehension of ready to order, main course, and medium (for a steak). Divide the class into groups of three. Get students to practise the conversation in groups. If students have problems with pronunciation,

drill key sections of the conversations and get students to practise again.

Give students time to prepare their roles and what they

want to order. Encourage them to rehearse the conversation a few times. Once they are more confident with the language, encourage them not to refer to the text in the Student's Book, but to work from their own memory. (With a weaker group, you could write simple sentence cues on the board to help with the roleplay.) Monitor and help as necessary. Get students to act out their conversations for the rest of the class.


SUGGESTION

If you have access to other real menus from British or American restaurants, bring copies of them into class and get students to roleplay other conversations, using the different menus. You will need to be careful that the menus you select contain language that is appropriate for the post-beginner level.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 12

Exercises 4—8 A range of exercises to practise the lexical set of food and'drink and the language of ordering in a restaurant.

READING

p94)

She only eats junk food

I Focus attention on the title of the text and check comprehension of junk food. Elicit an example of food from the list that is good for you, e.g. fruit. Students decide which other food they think is good for you and then compare answers in pairs. Check students' ideas with the whole class.

2     Tell the students your fávourite food and then elicit examples from the class. Be prepared to feed in relevant vocabulary if students request it.

3     Pre-teach/check oldest (as a lexical item only — don't do a full presentation of superlatives at this stage), generations, popcorn, die, granddaughter, grandma, and hairdresser. Ask students to read the article. Elicit students' reactions to the text and what they find unusual about Mary Alston. Ask them Who is the oldest person you know? What does he/she eat?

4     This exercise focuses on the details in the text and also provides question and answer practice. Focus attention on the example and then get students to continue matching and completing the sentences, working individually.

T 12.9

Get students to check their answers in pairs and then play the recording so that they can check against the tape.

4    What does she eat?

Popcorn, pizza, and burgers.

5    What was her job?

She was a teacher.

6    Where was she born?

On a farm in Pennsylvania.

9 When did she marry?

She married in 1915.

8   What time does she get up?

SUGGESTION

The text contains a series of numbers and dates. You could list these on the board and get students to check what they refer to: 109 — Mary Alston's age six — number of generations at her party 85 — her daughter's age

1915 — the year she married James

1983 — the year James died 65 — her granddaughter's age six — the time she gets up

She gets up at six o'clock.

9   Where does she go every Friday?

She goes to the hairdresser.

10    What did she say to her granddaughter?

'I'd tike a cheeseburger and fries!'

Divide the class into pairs and get them to practise the questions and answers. If students have problems with the intonation, drill key questions and answers and get students to repeat in pairs.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 12

Exercise I I Further reading practice on food and eating habits.

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

Going shopping

1   Focus attention on the photos. Use them to help you pre-teach/check film (for a camera), metre, shirt,


medium (size), try on, pair ofjeans, size, potatoes, anything else? Focus attention on the first conversation ir the Student's Book and on the example. Play the corresponding conversation on tape and elicit the missing sentences (Is there a chemist near here? and next to the bank). Play the rest of the recording, pausing at tht end of each one, and get students to complete the conversations, using the words given.

If necessary, play the recording again to allow students tc check/complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class.


and tapescript

B In a chemist

A Is            chemist near here?

B  Yes, two tmdred metresfrom here, next to the bank.

2   C Can I help you?

A No, that*s. I'm just looking

           A                     Do you                           ina medium?

4    A                please.

C Sure- What size are you?

A I think rmaforty.

C Fine. The changng rooms are over there.

5    D Yes, madam. What would you like?

A rd tike a of potatoes, please.

D Anything else?

           A NO,        all, thanks. HOW much is that?

6    A Excuse me! Do you sell Spanish newspapers?

E No, sorry, we dor{t.

A Where can buy them? E    railway station.

2 Pre-teach/check birthday card, phone card, T-shirt, small/medium/large. Put students in pairs and assign a role, A or B, to each student. Make sure they understand they have to ask for the things in their list. Check where you can buy a birthday card and a phone card (in a newsagent). Choose a pair of students to demonstrate the conversation with Student A asking for a birthday card, Then choose another pair with Student B asking for a phone card. Get students to continue practising the other conversations, working in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and intonation. If students have problems, drill key sections of the conversations and get students to practise again in closed pairs.

SUGGESTION

You can give students further practice in the language used when shopping with the photocopiable activity on TB pl 16. Photocopy enough pages for students to work in pairs. Cut up the lines of conversation and keep each set of lines together in an envelope. Hand out a set of lines to each pair of students and explain that they have to put the lines in order to make three shopping conversations. Give students time to do this and then check the answers.

B Ata postoffice.

A   Is thereapostoffice near here?

B   Yes, three hundred metres from here, next to the Internet café.

 

 

 

2    A Excuse me! Do you sell Le Monde?

B   No, I'm sorry. We don't.

A Where can I buy French newspapers? B Try the railway station.

3    A I'd like to try on this shirt, please.

B   Sure. What size are you?

A     Medium, I think.     

B     OK. The changing rooms are over there.

Elicit where the speakers are in each conversation (I — in the street, 2 — in a newsagent, 3 — in a clothes shop). Then get students to practise the conversations in closed pairs.

 

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 12 Exercises 12 and 13 Further practice of the language used when shopping. Don't forget!

Workbook Unit 12

Exercise 9 A pronunciation exercise to practise distinguishing vowel sounds,

Exercise 10 In this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

Word list

Ask the students to turn to p136 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.

Video

Episode 5 A night to remember

David's date with Julia is common knowledge in the house — and the others enjoy teasing him about it. Unfortunately, his dream date has very expensive tastes which cause the miserly David a great deal of suffering. She eats and drinks her way through his wallet at an Italian restaurant. The journey home by taxi is no better. After saying goodbye to Julia, and with no spare cash, David has to go the long journey home on foot.

EXTRA IDEAS UNITS 9-12

On TB p 117 there are additional photocopiable activities to review the language from Units 9—12. There is a reading text with tasks, a question formation exercise, and a matching activity on everyday English. You will need to pre-teach/check wonderful, surprise, nothing, postman, envelope, suitcase, and keep a secret for the reading text.

Introduction to the unit


This unit is called 'Here and now' and it introduces the Present Continuous in all forms. Students practise the tense in a range of contexts and it is contrasted with the Present Simple. The lexical set of clothes and colours is reviewed and extended, and this is a vehicle for further practice of the Present Continuous. Students also practise describing people with a focus on clothes, and colour of hair and eyes. There is a Reading and speaking section talking about what people usually do and what they are doing today. This consolidates the use of the two present tenses. The Everyday English section is called What's the matter? and it focuses on feelings such as tired, hungry, and suggestions with Why don't you ?

13

Language aims

Grammar — Present Continuous In New Headway Beginner, students meet and practise the Present Simple relatively early in the course and this tense is consolidated across the units. This unit introduces the Present Continuous after students have had the opportunity for thorough practise of the Present Simple. The unit contrasts the use of the two tenses and gives students the opportunity to practise them in tandem. Despite presenting the Present Continuous later than the Present Simple, the two tenses can still cause confusion.

POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

Many other languages do not have the equivalent of the Present

Continuous and they use a single present tense to express 'action which is true for a long time' and 'action happening now or around now'. This can lead students to use the Present Simple in English when they want to refer to action in progress:

*                   You wear a nice suit today.

Students also confuse the form of the two tenses. They are already familiar with am/is/are as parts of be, but they tend to start using them as the auxiliary with Present Simple, and using do/does as the auxiliary with Present Continuous. Common mistakes are:

*                   She's play tennis.

*                   I'm coming from Spain. * You're go to work by bus.

*                   What do           doing?

 DO they working today?

The Present Continuous can also be used to refer to the future and this is covered in Unit 14 of the course.

Vocabulary Clothes and colours are reviewed and extended and students practise describing people's appearance,

Everyday English This section is called What's the matter? and it focuses on feelings, e.g. tired, hungry, etc. and suggestions to make people feel better.

POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

English uses to be with hungry, thirsty, tired, cold, and hot, whereas other languages express the same idea with the equivalent of have, e.g. Spanish: Tengo sed; French: J'ai faim. This can lead students to use have with the adjectives in English and make the following mistakes:

* I have hunger. * He has cold.

Workbook Colours are reviewed and consolidated.

The Present Continuous is practised in all forms in a range of exercises. The Present Simple and Present Continuous are reviewed :n contrast.

Further reading practice is given with an exercise on a holiday postcard.

The lexical set of clothes and the function of describing people are consolidated in a range of exercises.

The language of talking about feelings and making suggestions from the Everyday English section is further practised.

Notes on the unit

I This Starter section reviews and extends the lexical set of colours and clothes. Focus attention on the colours and get students to find the colour black in the pictures as an example. Students continue finding the colours, working in pairs.

T 13 .1

2Pre-teach/check jacket, trousers, shirt, and shoes. Focus attention on the example and then get students to complete the sentences. Play the recording and get students to check their answers.

and tapescript

I Georg& jacket is black. Sadie's jacket is red. 2 His trousers are grey. Her trousers are green.

3               Her shirt is yellow. His shirt is white.

4               shoes are blue. His shoes are brown.

Play the recording again and get students to repeat the sentences. Students then practise the sentences in pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation of the colours and clothes.

3 Demonstrate the activity by talking about the colours of your clothes. Use the model in exercise 2, e.g. My shirt is blue, etc. and do not use I'm wearing at this stage. Elicit examples from one or two students and then get them to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation of the colours and clothes,

WORK AND HOLIDAYS

p97)

P resent Continuous

This section reviews the Present Simple and introduces the positive forms of the Present Continuous. Exercise I highlights the use of Present Simple for facts and repeated actions.

Refer students back to the picture of George in the

Starter section. Tell students they are going to read about

his job. Pre-teach/check wear and enjoy and then focus attention on the example. Ask students to complete the rest of the text with the verbs.

Ask students to check in pairs and then check with the whole class by getting students to say the sentences aloud.

Answers

George works in a bank. He starts-work at 9.00 and he leaves work at 5.30. He always wears a black jacket and grey trousers. He has lunch at 1.00. He sometimes goes to the park and reads his newspaper. He enjoys his job.

T 13.2

2This exercise introduces the Present Continuous for actions happening now and around now. Focus attention on the picture of George and his wife. Establish that they are on holiday. Play the recording and get Students to read the text. If students query the verb forms, tell them they are in the Present Continuous, but do not go into a full explanation at this stage.

T 13.3

3Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage students to reproduce the contracted forms and the linking between -ingand a vowel:

He's wearing a T-shirt.

Check students understand that 's is the contracted form of is, and 're the contracted form of are.

4 Briefly review the use of is and are bv getting students to say which verb can go with which subject (is — George, His wife; are — We, Four people, Tuo people, and They).

Demonstrate the activity by eliciting the answer for George (George is reading the menu. ) Students continue making sentences, working individually.

Get students to check in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers

George is reading the meru His wife is wearing a blue T-shirt Four people are swimming.

Two people are playing temis.

We are enjoying our holiday.

GRAMMAR SPOT

Focus attention on the examples and read the notes with the whole class. Ask students to underline the Present Continuous forms in the text in exercise 2. Highlight the full and short forms, e.g. He's wearing. , His wife is reading

2 Read the notes with the whole class. Remind students of the -ing form by giving students the infinitive and

They are having lunch

13 •


eliciting the -ing form, e.g. go — going, eat — eating, swim — swimming, etc.

3 Focus attention on the sentences. Complete the first one with the whole class as an example

(am studying). Then ask students to complete the other sentences.

Lam studying English.

   You are wearing jeans.

 She is reading a book.

              We are working in class.  They are having lunch.

Highlight that the Present Continuous can be used for actions happening now, e.g. You're wearing jeans, and around now, e.g. I am studying English.

Read Grammar Reference 13.1 on p127 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it.

PRACTICE

Speaking

I This exercise gives practice in the he/she and they forms of Present Continuous positive. Focus attention on the silhouettes and briefly review the verbs students will need to use (cook, drive, have a shower, write, ski, eat an ice-cream, run, dance, and playfootball.) With a weaker group, you could write the verbs on the board.

Focus attention on the example and highlight the use of

the contracted form. Elicit one or two more examples and then get students to continue making sentences, working in pairs. Monitor and check for correct formation of the Present Continuous,

T 13.4

Play the recording and get students to check their answers. If students had problems during the task, play the recording again and get students to repeat.

Answers and tapescript 1 Hek cooking.

2 HeS driving. 3 He's having a shower.

      4            writing.

 5              skiing.

      6           eating an ice-cream.

 7 Therre running.

 8 They're dancing.

9 Theyre playing football.

2 Demonstrate the meaning of mime. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles and drill the language, Choose an activity that you can mime for the students and get them to guess what you are doing.

Encourage them to give sentences in the Present Continuous rather than just call out the infinitive verb forms. Divide the students into pairs and get them to continue miming and guessing. Get them to change roles after each mime. Monitor and check for correct formation of the Present Continuous.

SUGGESTION

You can provide further practice of Present Continuous positive forms by getting students to think about what their family and friends are doing. Write the following questions on the board:

   What are you doing now?

   What are your parents/friends/brothers and sisters/children doing now?

Demonstrate the activity by giving your own answers,

e.g.

I'm teaching English. I'm working in Room ... with Class . ..

My mother's working at home.

Elicit some more examples from one or two students,

e.g.

I'm studying English. I'm sitting in Room next to My parents are having dinner.

Divide the class into pairs and get students to continue exchanging examples. Monitor and check for correct formation of the Present Continuous, Feed back on any common errors with the tense, and if necessary drill the corrected forms.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 13

Exercise I A review of colours.

Exercise 2 An exercise to consolidate the formation of the - ing form.

Exercise 3 An exercise to consolidate the positive form of the Present Continuous.

I'M WORKING (SBp98)

Questions and negatives

T 13.5

1This section introduces Present Continuous question forms (wh- and Yes/No questions) and negatives. Pre-teach/check model, fashion show, listener, special, and talk (verb). Focus attention on the photo and

ask What's her name? (Sadie) and mat's her job? (She's a

model.) Play the recording and get students to read and listen to the interview. Check students understand what it in I'm enjoying it very much refers to (being in Milan Ask students to underline the Present Continuous questions in the interview.

2 This is a transformation exercise to practise Present Continuous questions with she. Write the question and answer What are you doing in Milan? and working. on the board, underlining the subject and auxiliary. Elicit the changes needed to make the question and answer about Sadie; What doing in Milan? working. Drill the language in the speech bubbles chorally and individually. Get students to continue asking and answering about Sadie, working in closed pairs. (With a weaker group, you could elicit and drill the questions and answers first, and then get students to work in closed pairs.) Monitor and check for correct formation of Present Continuous third person singular questions and answers,

Check the answers with the whole class.

I Focus attention on the questions and read the notes with the whole class. Highlight the full and short forms used.

2      Focus attention on the negatives and read the notes with the whole class. Highlight that short forms are usually used in the negatives. Ask students to underline the negative form in the interview in exercise 1.

3      Focus attention on the short answers and read the notes with the whole class. Highlight the full and short forms used. Ask students to underline the short answers In the interview in exercise 1.

Read Grammar Reference 13.2 and 13.3 on PI 27 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 13

Exercise 4 An exercise to consolidate the positive and negative forms of the Present Continuous.

PRACTICE

Asking questions

I This exercise reviews wh- question words and practises Present Continuous question formation. Focus attention on the cartoons and check comprehension of all the verbs and answers given. Focus attention on the example and then elicit the question words and nouns that the students need to use:

2      what?

3      where?

4      why/three j umpers? 5 what?

6 how many? 7 who?

T 13.6

Get students to write the questions using the verbs in brackets, working individuallv. Play the recording and get students to check their answers.

 Answers and tapescript

I  A What are you reading?

B A love story.

2     A What are you watching?

            B The news.

3     A Where are you going? B To my bedroom,

 A Why are you wearing B Because rm cold.

5      A What are you eating?

B Chocolate.

6      A How many cakes are B Five.

 7 A Who are you  B My girlfriend.

If you feel students need more question and answer practice, play the recording again and get students to repeat. Encourage them to reproduce the falling intonation of the wh- questions. Students then practise the questions and answers in closed pairs.

2 This exercise practises Yes/No question formation in the Present Continuous. Focus attention on the cues and the example questions and short answers. Highlight that the question form is an inversion of the statement form. Get students to write the question forms for the exercise, working individually.

Check the answers with the whole class.

Answers

I 2

3

4

     5


13 •

6    Is it raining?1 This section provides skills practice in reading and

7    Are all the students speaking English?     speaking, and also highlights the difference between the

8    Are you learning a lot of English?Present Simple and Present Continuous. Students also

 

 

review the Past Simple in each reading text and in the

Model and drill the examples in the speech bubbles.

 

questions.

Encourage students to reproduce the rising intonation of

 

Exercise I is a warm-up activity for the reading stage. It

the Yes/No questions, Tell students that they have to

 

reviews the use of Present Simple for routines. Pre-teach/

stand up and ask the questions in a •mingle' activity and

 

check Christmas Day. Give brief examples of what you

that they should give true short answers. Get students to

 

do on each of the days and then elicit two or three more

do the activity and monitor and check for correct

 

examples from the class. Students then continue asking

question formation, intonation, and short answers.

 

and answering in closed pairs. Go round and help. Monitor and check but do not focus too heavily on

Check it

 

errors as this activity is to raise interest in the topic,

3 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an

 

rather than to test accuracy.

example. Students continue working individually to

2

Pre-teach/check the following new words from the texts:

choose the correct sentence.

 

meet (friends), get married, stand (state verb), adult

Get students to check their answers in pairs before

 

(noun), have a barbecue, swimsuit, pack your bags, and ski

checking with the whole class.

 

clothes. Also review the irregular past forms in the texts; get up — got up

Answers

 

get (receive) — got

I I'm wearing a blue shirt today.

 

go — went

2 Where are you going?

 

find —found

3    Peter isn't working this week.

4    Tha€s Peter over there. Hes talking to the teacher.

 

Assign a role and a text to each student and remind them

     5 Heidi is German. She comes from Berlin.        

 

to read only their text:

Student A — Isabel

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

 

Student B — Leo

Student C — Mark

Workbook Unit 13

 

Student D — Becca

Exercise 5 An exercise to consolidate questions and short

 

Get students to read their text quickly and match the text

answers in the Present Continuous.

 

to the correct photo. Briefly check the answers.

                 Isabel — photo 3

Leo — photo 4

Today's different                                                                                                   Mark — photo I

Becca — photo 2

NOTES

This is the first 'jigsaw' reading in the course. It is a  3 Focus attention on the questions. Pre-teach/check What technique which integrates reading and speaking skills.        happened ? in question 4. Get students to work

Students read one of four texts and they then work in and answer the questions about their text. individually groups and exchange information about their text in a Ask them to note down the answers to their questions. speaking phase. It's important to remind students to (With a weaker group, you could put all the A, B, C, and read only their text and to get information about the D students in separate groups so that they help each other texts via speaking. other answer the questions.) Go round and help as

SUGGESTION

You might want to feed in the language students can use for the information exchange, e.g.

DO you want to start?

You next.

Sorry, I don't understand. Can you repeat, please?

In the lesson before the photo of me stage, ask necessary. students to bring in a photograph of themselves to talk about in class. Tell them that the photo needs to be an 'action shot' and show:

      where you are     who you're with

      what you're doing what you're wearing

Get students to look up any useful words they need to talk about the picture. Also bring in a photo of yourself so that you can demonstrate the activity.


4 Divide the class into groups of four. Make sure there is an A, B, C, and D student in each group. Demonstrate the activity by getting a couple of students from one group to talk about their text. Students continue exchanging the information about their text. Monitor and check for correct use of the Present Simple, Present Continuous, and Past Simple. Conduct a short follow-up phase by asking general questions, e.g. Who has a similar routine to you? 2 Who is having the most interesting day?

Who would you most like to be?

Finally, feed back on any common errors from the information exchange and review the use of the tenses as necessary.

A photo of me                                                                    3

Demonstrate the activity by talking about a photo of yourself. Then elicit one or two more examples from students in the class, Get students to continue working in pairs and talking about their photo. Monitor and check for correct use of be and of the Present Continuous.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 13

Exercises 6 and 7 Exercises to consolidate the Present

Simple and Present Continuous. 4 Exercise 9 Further reading practice and consolidation of the Present Simple and Present Continuous.

VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Clothes

5

1 This section reviews and extends the lexical set of clothes, introduces language for describing colour of hair and eyes, and recycles the Present Continuous in the context of describing people. Focus attention on the pictures of the models and on the example. Students continue labelling the clothes, working individually. Check the answers with the whole class.

T 13.7

Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Check students can distinguish shirt and skirt and that they pronounce trousers correctly — /•trauzaz/, Elicit which items are for women (a skirt and a dress). Highlight the use Of a with the singular items, e.g. a jumper, and that the plural items do not need a, e.g. boots. Highlight that the word trousers is plural in English, as this is different in other languages,

Briefly review the colours presented in the Starter section. Focus attention on the example in the speech bubble. Drill the language chorally and individually. Elicit one or two more examples from the class and then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of clothes, colours, and the Present Continuous.

Focus attention on the example in the speech bubbles. Drill the language chorally and individually. Encourage students to reproduce the rising intonation on the Yes/No questions. Demonstrate the activity by standing back to back with a student and asking about his/her clothes. Divide the students into pairs, asking students to work with a different partner from another part of the room, Monitor and check for correct use of Present Continuous questions and short answers, names of clothes, and colours.

This exercise consolidates names of clothes and colours, and also recycles the Present Simple for talking about routines. Get students to ask vou the questions and give true answers. Divide the class into pairs and get them to continue asking and answering. Monitor and check for -correct use of Present Simple, names of clothes, and colours.

This exercise presents the language used for describing hair and eyes. Plav the first line of the recording and elicit the word to complete sentence I (fair). Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete the sentences. Check the answers with the whole class.

Answers and tapescript

U I She has long, fair hair.

2     He has short, black hair.

3     She has blue eyes.

4     He has brown eyes.

Focus attention on the example in the speech bubble. Demonstrate the activity by describing a student and getting the others to guess who it is. Elicit one or two more examples from the class and then get students to continue in closed pairs or small groups. Monitor and check for correct use of the Present Continuous, names of clothes, and language Of describing people.

Unit 13 •

SUGGESTIONS

1    You can also do a 'describe and guess' activity based on pictures from magazines or students' own photographs. Student A describes a person in the picture or photo and Student B guesses who is it. Students then change roles.

2    You can review the Present Continuous and the language of describing with the photocopiable activity on TB pl 18. This is an information gap using different pictures. Photocopy enough pages for your students to work in pairs. Tell them that they are going to work with a partner and ask questions to find six differences between two similar pictures of a family. Divide the class into pairs. Give Student A and Student B their respective pictures. Remind them they shouldn't look at each other's picture. Drill the type of questions students can ask: What is (the father) wearing? Is (the mother) listening to music? etc,

Tell students to circle the part of their picture when they find a difference. Students work in pairs to find all six differences. Monitor and check.

Students compare their pictures to check they have found the differences.

Student A points to a cartoon and Student B says the corresponding sentence.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 13

Exercises 10—13 A range of exercises to review clothes and the language of describing people.

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

Wha€s the matter?

1 This section presents the language of talking about feelings and offering suggestions. Establish that the people in the cartoons all have problems, and pre-teach/ check the question What's the matter? Focus attention on the cartoons and elicit the answer for sentence I (She's cold.) Students continue completing the sentences, working individually.

T 13.9

Play the recording through once and get students to check their answers. Answers and tapescript

4         thirsty. 2 He's hungry.        5 Theyre hot.

      3 Theyretired.                  6 Wsbored.

Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure they pronounce tired and bored as one syllable — /tarad/, /bo:d/ rather than */tarred/, * /b3'.red/. Get students to wofk in pairs. 2 Focus attention on the conversation. Play the recording and get students to read and listen. Play the recording again and get students to repeat. Highlight the use of Why don't you ? for making suggestions.

 

SUGGESTION

Try to integrate language from the Everyday English sections in your lessons and encourage students to do the same. There is a big range of language that can be used quite naturally in the classroom context to reinforce the communicative value of what the students are learning. This includes: What's the matter? I'm Why don't you ?

Pardon?

All right.

Excuse me.

Sorry

I don't know.

I don't understand. Please./Thank you, How do you spell . Can I     ?

3 Check comprehension of the ideas in the lists. Elicit one or two more conversations from the class and then get students to continue in closed pairs, using the words from exercise 1. Monitor and check for correct use of the adjectives and Why don'tyou . .. ?

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 13

Exercises 14 and 15 Further practice of the language of feelings and suggestions from the Everyday English section.

Don't forget!

Workbook Unit 13

Exercise 8 In this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

Word list

Ask the students to turn to pl 37 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.


14 Question word revision

Present Continuous for future

Travel and transport • Going sightseeing

Introduction                         Language aims

to the unit                                                  Grammar — Present Continuous for future plans Students will be familiar with the form of the Present Continuous, having practised it for talking about

This unit is called 'It's time to go!' and actions happening now or around now in Unit 13. This unit presents and

POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

The use of a present tense to refer to future plans may seem strange to students at first, but they soon become accustomed to it with practice. In the presentation and practice, ask a simple concept question — Now or future? about the use of the tense to make sure students are clear about the time reference.

. ts theme is travel, transport, and practises its other use — talking about future plans. 'ightseeing. The use of Present uontinuous for future plans is 2resented, building on students' -alowledge of the form of this tense trom Unit 13. Wh- question words are reviewed as part of the practice of asking about plans with the Present continuous. Students also get listening speaking practice with a section on Question words The questions words students have met in previous units are holiday plans, using the Present reviewed as part of the practice of the Present Continuous questions for future continuous for future. The lexical set plans. transport and travel is reviewed and extended, and there is a Reading section Vocabulary The lexical set of travel and transport is reviewed and extended.

an amazing journey by car. The       Students focus on forms of transport and collocations, e.g. book a hotel, catch a travel theme is carried through in the    plane, etc. The travel theme is carried through in the Reading section with a text Everyday English section with a focus  on an amazing journey in a Mini car!

sightseeing. Everyday English This highlights and practises the language used when talking about places you have visited and also practises conversations in a tourist office. Workbook The Present Continuous for future plans is consolidated in the positive and question forms. Students also focus on the time reference in different Present Continuous sentences, and get further practice in understanding plans in a listening task.

There is a pronunciation exercise to practise shifting sentence stress.

The lexical set of travel and transport is consolidated.

Further reading and listening practice is given with another text on an eventful journey.

The language of going sightseeing from the Everyday English section is further practised.

Notes on the unit

STARTER

1    This Starter section reviews days, months, and how we say years in English. It also establishes the concepts of 'now' and 'future? as preparation for talking about future plans in the next section. Focus attention on the questions and elicit the answers from the class. Make sure students use and correctly when they say the year: 2002 — two thousand and two. Also check

14


for correct pronunciation and word stress in the months and days.

2    Get students to say the months round the class. If students have problems remembering the months, or pronouncing them, drill the words chorally and individually and then get students to repeat the task.

HOLIDAY PLANS

 

 

Repeat the above procedure for the days of the week.

Present Continuous for future

T 14.1

1Focus attention on the photo and ask What's her name? (Ellie.) Focus attention on her diary and explain that it shows her plans for next week. Pre-teach/check collect tickets pack bags, and fly from the diary. Play the recording and get students to listen and read Ellie's diary. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Elicit why Ellie is excited (She's going on holiday to

      Mexico.)                                                                           Workbook Unit 14

Exercises 1 and 2 Exercises to consolidate the form and Tapescriptconcept of the Present Continuous for future.

T 14.2


I'm going on holiday to Mexico next Friday, so next weeWs very busy. On Monday I'm collecting my tickets from theQuestions travel agent. I'm going on holiday with my friends Ed and


Lucy, so on Tuesday I'm meeting them after work and we're going shopping. On Wednesday I'm seeing the doctor at eleven o'clock, then I'm having lunch with mum. On Thursday I'm leaving work early and I'm packing. I'm taking just a bag and a rucksack. Then i€s Friday. Fridays the big day! At six thirty in the morning I'm going by taxi to the airport. rm meeting Ed and Lucy there and at nine thirty ware flying to Mexico City. I'm very excited!

2 This exercise presents the use of the Present Continuous for future plans, but treat it initially as an information gap-fill and leave the explanation of the tense use until you focus on the Grammar Spot section. Focus attention on sentence I as an example. Also elicit the answer to the second gap in sentence 3 (having) to alert students to the need for the -ing form in some sentences.

GRAMMAR SPOT

I Read the notes as a class. Focus attention on the examples and ask Now orfuture? about each one (future). Establish that the form is the same as the tense students used in Unit 13 to talk about actions happening now, but that these sentences refer to future time.

2 Ask students to underline the examples of the

Present Continuous in the sentences in exercise I of Grammar Spot.

Read Grammar Reference 14.1 on p127 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it.

Get students to complete the sentences, working individually. Get them to check in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers

I On Monday shes collecting her tickets from the travel agent.

 2 On Tuesday she meeting Ed and Lucy after work and they're going shopping.  

 On Wednesday she's seeing the doctor at 11 Otlock, then she's having lunch with her mother.

4 On Thursday she's leaving work early and she's packing her bags.

5 On Fridayat6-30 in the morning sheSgoing by taxi to the airport and she's meeting Ed and Lucy there. At 9.30  thefre flying to Mexico.

3This section focuses on wh- questions with the Present Continuous for future plans. Focus attention on the question and answer and refer students back to Ellie's diary. Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage them to reproduce the falling intonation on the wh- question. Focus attention on the speech bubbles and elicit the answer (She's meeting Ed and Lucy. They're going shopping.) Get students to practise the exchange in open pairs. Students then continue in closed pairs, asking and answering the questions about the other days of the week. Monitor and check for correct question formation and intonation.


Check the answers by getting students to ask and answer across the class.

Whars she doing on Wednesday? seeing the doctor at Tl otlock. Then she's haying lunch with her mother. Whats she doing on Thursday? leaving work early she packing her bags.

Whars she doing on Friday? She' going by taxi to the airport and meeting Ed and Lucy there. Theyre flying to Mexico at 9.30 a.m.

4 Write your own diary for the next four days on the board. Give true examples if the language generated is within the students' range. If not, modify the examples so that they contain language students will recognize, e.g

Tuesday — 6.30 p. m. play tennis with Dave

                     — 7.30                             Jim in the

Thursday — collect theatre tickets

Ifs

Friday — go swimming

Revise tomorrow and on with days of the week. Elicit the question What are you doing tomorrow? from a student and reply with the information in your diary. Ask the question What are you doing? and highlight the shift in stress:

S: What are you doing tomorrow?

T: VThat are you doing?

Get students to ask you about the other three days and ask them the question back, highlighting the stress each time.

Ask students to write notes about their plans for the next four days. Elicit two or three examples of the exchange in open pairs. Then ask students to continue in closed pairs, finding out about each other's plans for the rest of the week. Monitor and check for correct question formation, intonation, and change in stress.

3 This exercise consolidates question formation with the Present Continuous and reviews wh- question words from previous units. Focus attention on the picture of Ellie and on the first two lines of the conversation. Ask Where is Ellie? (She's at work.) Ask What is she doing?

(She's reading about Mexico and talking to a friend.) Pre-teach/check lucky. Focus attention on the example and then get students to complete the conversation with the question words,

Get students to check in pairs before playing the recording. Check the answers with the whole class.

Answers and tapescript A           are you doing?

E rmreadingabout Mexico.

A Why?

E Because I'm going there on holiday soon.

A Oh lovely! When are you leaving?

E Wùe leaving next Friday. A Who are you going with?

E My friends Ed and Lucy.

A How are you travelling?

E  travelling by plane to Mexico City, then by bus and trú around the country.           

A Whee are you staying?

E Wdre staying in small hotels and hostels.

A You're so lucky! Have a good time!

E Thanks very much,

Get students to practise the conversation in closed pairs. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversations and get students to practise again in closed pairs.

1     This exercise highlights the question form in all persons. Focus attention on the examples and then get students to form the question with When and he, she, we, and they. Check the answers by getting students to say the questions aloud, Check for the correct intonation (falling).

When is he leaving?

When is she leaving?

When are we leaving?

When are they leaving?

Get students to underline the question forms in the conversation in exercise 5.

2     This exercise highlights the present and future uses of the Present Continuous. Ask students to answer the questions in pairs and then check with the whole class,

Answers

I'm reading about Mexico. (now) I'm leaving next Friday, (future)

Refer students back to Grammar Reference 14.1 on p127.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 14

Exercise 3 An exercise to practise wh- questions with the Present Continuous for future.

Listening and speaking

1 This section consolidates the Present Continuous for future with a listening task and information gap activity

on holiday plans. Students are also given the opportunity to personalize the language by talking about their own holiday plans.

Focus attention on the photos Of the places and ask students to guess where they are. Tell students they are going to find out about the holiday plans of the people in the photos. Check the pronunciation of the names Marco /'ma:keu/, Rachel and Lara, / t re1tJI an 'la:ro/, and Didier /'didiei/,

Exercise I consolidates the use of wh- questions with the Present Continuous for future. Briefly review the question words by putting a list of very short answers about your own holidays on the board and elicit the correct question word, e.g.

14

France (where?)

In August (when?)

For three weeks (how long?)

In a hotel (where?)

By plane (how?)

Because I want to relax on the beach (why?)

Focus attention on the cues in the chart and the example questions. Highlight the use of the Present Continuous by asking Now orfuture? (future). Then get students to write the other questions, using the cues in the chart.

T 14.4

Tell students they are going to listen to people talking about Marco's holiday plans and they have to check the questions and also complete the missing information. (With a weaker group, you could play the recording through once first and get students to check the questions, and then play it again for students to complete the missing information, ) Play the recording and get students to complete the task. If necessary, play the recording again to allow students to complete their answers- Check the answers with the whole class, highlighting the use of the in the date.

Answers and tapescript

A            going on holiday, B Oh, where's he going?

A To Banff, in Canada.

 Why is he going there?

A    Because ifs good for skiing and he wants to go skiing.

B    When is he leaving?

A   Next week on the third of March.

B    How is he travelling?

A    By plane to Vancouver and then by train to Banff.

B    Where is he staying?

A    In the Banff Springs Hotel.

B     And how long is he staying? A Just ten days.

Chart

      When/leave?                         3 March

      How/travel?                           by plane and train

       How long/stay?                    10 days

2      Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Drill the language, highlighting the falling intonation on the wh- question. Then elicit one or two more exchanges in open pairs. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of the Present Continuous for future, and for intonation in the questions.

3      This is an Information gap activity based on Rachel and Lara's, and Didier's holiday plans. Pre-teach uncle and youth hostel from the charts on PI 39 and p140 of their books. Check the pronunciation of the places Whangaparada / New Zealand /nju:

'zi:land/, Paris /'pærrs/, and Edinburgh /'edmbra].

Remind students of the question to ask to check spelling

les

— How do you spell .. . ? Divide the class into pairs and assign a role, Student A or Student B, to each student. Refer all the Student As to pl 39 and all the Student Bs to PI 40. Explain that students have to ask and answer questions and get the information to complete their chart. Remind them not to show each other their chart but to exchange the information through speaking. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles and drill the language. Students continue asking and answering in closed pairs. (With a weaker group, you could elicit all the questions from the cues in the chart as a class activity and then get students to do the information exchange.) Monitor and check for correct use of the Present Continuous, intonation on the whquestions, and use of the alphabet. Get students to check their answers by comparing their completed charts. Feed back on any common errors in a brief follow-up session.

4 This exercise gives students the opportunity to talk about their own holiday plans, Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Drill the language and then get students to ask you the questions. Elicit one or two more exchanges in open pairs and then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of Present Continuous.

The second phase of this exercise practises the third person singular form. Focus attention on the example in the speech bubble and highlight the third person forms in the verbs. Elicit more examples from the class.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 14

Exercise 4 Further listening practice based on a diary activity of future plans.

Talking about you

5 This section reviews the Past Simple with both regular and irregular verbs and gives practice of Yes/No questions with the Present Continuous for future plans.

It also highlights the intonation of the Yes/No question forms.

Read through the list of sentences about yesterday and ask Now or past? (past). Briefly review the verbs forms by eliciting the corresponding infinitive, e.g. got up —get up, went—go, walked — walk, etc. Focus attention on the example for number I and ask Now or future? (future). Elicit the questions for numbers 2 and 3 (Are you going swimming tomorrow? Are you walking to work tomorrow?) Get students to write the questions, working individually.

T 14.5

Play the recording through once and ask students to check they have formed the questions correctly. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage them to reproduce the rising intonation on the Yes/No questions. Review the formation of short answers by getting students to ask you questions l, 2, 6, and 7. (These are the questions that students can apply to all students.) Reply Yes, I arn./No, I'm not. And then get students to ask and answer in open pairs. Check for intonation and drill the questions again if necessary. Students then ask and answer in closed pairs.

Answers and tapescript I I got up early.

Are getting early tomorrow? 2 I went swimming.

Are you going swimúg tomorrow? 3 I walked to work.

Are you walking to work tomorrow?

4    I tud lunch in my office.

Are you having lunch in your office tomorrow?

5    I left work late.

Are you leaving work late tomorrow?

6    I met a friend.

Are you meeting a friend tomorrow?

7    We had dinner in a restaurant.

Are you having dinner in a restaurant tomorrow?

6 This exercise gives students the opportunity to use the Past Simple and the Present Continuous for future to talk about themselves. Demonstrate the activity by writing five things that you did yesterday on the board,

e.g. went to the cinema. Elicit the question about tomorrow and give an answer, e.g. Are you going to the cinema tomorrow? No, I'm not. I'm playing squash. Drill the examples in the speech bubbles and then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of the Past Simple and the Present Continuous for future, and for correct intonation. Feed back on any common errors with the whole class.

SUGGESTION

Try to review the past Simple and the Present Continuous for future by talking about what students did/are going to do at different times, e.g. last/next weekend, during the last/next holidays, on their last/next birthday, etc. You can set up short pair or group work activities as 'warm-up' stages at the start of a class, or as 'fillers' for students who finish a task before the others.

Check it

- Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example, Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence.

Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Answers

I I'm leaving tomorrow.

2   We'regoing to the cinema this evening.

3   Where are they going on holiday?

4   What are you doing on Saturday evening? S What are you doing tomorrow?

READING

An amazing journey

I Check comprehension of the title of the text To Australia and back in a Mini. Tell students they are going to read about an amazing journey in a car. Focus attention on the questions. Get students to ask vou the questions and give true answers. Get the students to ask and answer the questions in closed pairs.

2      Focus attention on the photo and caption, and the map.

Elicit the answers to the questions ( John and Carys Pollard. Their car is about 40 years old. It's a Mini.) Ask students to predict what happens on the amazing journey.

3      Pre-teach/check cost (verb), later, still ( adverb), Moscow, Finland, the Arctic Circle, via, return (verb), ship (noun), give something a rest. Tell students that the text contams a lot of numbers and dates. Get students to read the text through quickly and underline each one. Briefly elicit if students predictions about the text were correct. Then elicit how we say each number and date. Check students understand what each number and date refers to:

1964 — the year Mr Pollard bought the Mini

£505 — the price of the Mini

250,000 — the number of miles the Mini has done

      59       — Mr Pollard's age

1966          — the year Mr Pollard drove to Moscow, Finland, and the Arctic Circle

1967          — the year Mr Pollard married his wife

      30      — the number of years Mr Pollard and Mrs

Pollard stayed in Australia

The questions test comprehension of the details in the text and consolidate the Past Simple and Present Continuous for future, Pre-teach twice for the answer to number 5. Focus attention on the examples and check students understand the convention of ticking (V) true information and crossing (X) false information, Remind them they need to correct the false sentences. Get students to read the text more slowly and complete the task.


14


Get students to check the answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Highlight the use Of contrastive stress in the sentences that needed correcting.

Answers

I He didn't buy a VW. He bought a Mini.

3

4    He didn't pay £250,000 for it. He paid £505 for it.

5    He didn't go to Russia three times in his old Mini. He went to Russia twice.

7   John and his wife didn't stay in Australia because they had no money. They stayed in Australia because John found a job.

8   They aren't buying a new Mini soon. They don't want to sell their old Mini.

9   They aren't returning to Australia by ship. Theyre returning to Australia by plane.

r 14.6

4 Focus attention on the interview. Check students understand the abbreviations of the speakers (I Interviewer, JP = John Pollard). Elicit the words to complete the first gap ( In 1964). Iëll students to complete the rest of the interview, using the information in the text. Play the recording and get students to check their answers.

Answers and tapescript

I This is an amazing car, John. When did you buy it?

JP In 1964, when I was a student.

I And how much did it cost?

JP £505.

I Why did you buy it?

JP Because I wanted to travel. In 1966 1 drove to Moscow,

Finland, and the Arctic Circle.

      I Does your wife like the Mini?

JP Oh, yes. She loves it. We married in 1967 and we drove to

Australia via India. We stayed in Australia for thirty years.

I When did you come back to England?

JP Last month.

I Are you going back to Australia?

JP Yes, we are. We're flying back next month.

I Are you leaving the Mini in England?

JP No, we aren't. The Mini is travelling by ship.

Get students to practise the conversation in closed pairs. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of thë conversation and get students to practise again in closed pairs. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 14

Exercises 10 and I I Further reading and listening practice.

I€s

VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING (5B Transport and travel

1    This section reviews and extends the lexical set of transport and travel, and also gives fUrther practice of the Past Simple. Focus attention on the words in the bo and the pictures. Elicit the answer for number I ( bicycle and get students to continue matching, working in pairs Check the answers with the whole class, making sure students can pronounce the words correctly.

I bicycle

2    motorbike

3    ship

4    the Underground    

2      Elicit one or two more examples of forms of transport from the class, e.g. car, bus, and then get students to continue working in groups of three. Elicit the answers, checking the spelling and the pronunciation, and write them on the board in groups: by road/rail, by air, by sea.

      Possible answers                                  

By road/rail   By air     By sea   car         plane helicopter coach lorry train

3      This is a collocation exercise with common travel word: Focus attention on the example and then get students continue matching, working in pairs. Check the answer with the whole class.

pack your bags book a hotel catch a plane have a great time arrive in Rome go sightseeing

4      This exercise consolidates the collocations presented in exercise 3. Focus attention on the first and last sentence given as examples and then elicit the second sentence ( We booked the hotel and the flight.) Get students to wri 2 in the correct box. Students continue ordering sentences, working individually.

T 14.7

Get students to check in pairs before playing th recording and getting students to check against the

Answers and tapescript We wanted to have a holiday in Rome.

We booked the hotel and the flight. We collected our tickets from the travel agent, We packed bags.

We went to the airport.

We caught the plane.

We arrived in Rome.

We went sightseeing. We had a great time:

5 This exercise gives further practice in the Past Simple and the language of transport and travel. Demonstrate the activity by talking about a journey you went on. Say where you went, how you travelled, and how long the journey was. Elicit another example from a confident student and then get students to continue in closed pairs or groups of three, taking it in turns to ask and answer about a journey in the past. Monitor and check for correct use of the Past Simple and names of transport.

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 14

Exercises 8 and 9 Exercises to practise the lexical set of travel and transport.

EVERYDAY ENGLISH

Going sightseeing

I This sections focuses on the topic of sightseeing. Focus attention on the names of the cities and the dates. Elicit sentences by asking Where and when? (I went to London in July 1999.1 went to Paris in April 2001.) Ask What did you see? and WOtat did you buy? and elicit possible information about sights and souvenirs, e.g. We saw Buckingham Palace. We bought some clothes. We saw the Eiffel Tower. We bought some wine.

Review the question Did you have a good time? Get students to write down two cities and dates when they were a tourist. Students talk about the cities in the closed pairs, using the ideas in the Student's Book Encourage them to ask Did you have a good time? about each trip,

2      This section practises typical conversations in a tourist office and reviews would like from Unit 12. Focus attention on the photos and ask Where are the people? (In a tourist Office.) and What are they asking about? (A map, a bus tour, and a museum.) Pre-teach/check take (verb to show length Of time). Make sure students understand that there are a different number of words in each gap each time.


3


T 14.8

Play the first line of the conversation and elicit the words for the first gap ( help you), Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete the conversations. If necessary, play the recording again and allow students to complete any missing answers. Then check the answers with the whole class.

Answers and tapescript

                                                                                                                           I A Hello. Can I help you?            

 B Yes. Id like a map of the town, please.

A  Here you are.

B  Thank you.

2 C We'd like to goon a bus tour of the city.

A Thaes fine. The next bus leaves at 10.00, It takes an                hour.

C  Where does the bus go from?

A It goes from the railway station in Princes Street.

3      D Wed like to visit the museum. When is it open? A From ten o'clock to five o'clock every day D How much is it to get in? A les free.

Get students to practise the conversations In closed pairs. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversation and get students to practise again in closed pairs.

This exercise gives students the opportunitv to talk about sights in their town or city, and also to roleplav conversations in a tourist office. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Check comprehension of market. Give an example of places to visit in vour town and elicit more examples from the class about places where they live, Students continue in closed pairs. Write key words from the students' examples on the board to help them during the roleplav, e.g.

Nouns: cathedral, museum, art gallery, square, monument, college, theatre, palace

Verbs: go on a tour, see, visit, buy, go to, take a photo of Divide the class into pairs and get them to make up conversations, using the conversations exercise 2 as a model. Let students write their conversations down in the initial stage and go round monitoring and helping. Give students time to rehearse their conversations a few times but then encourage them not to refer to the text when they act out the roleplays. (With a weaker group, you could draft the conversations as a class activity and write them up on the board. Students rehearse from the text on the board. Then rub off some of the words from the board so that there are just key words left and get students to act out the conversations.)

14 • les

SUGGESTION

You can give students further practice in talking about sightseeing with the photocopiable activity on TB p 119. This is an information gap activity— Student A has information about Emma and Student B has information about Nick. There is also space for students to exchange information about a trip they went on. Photocopy enough pages for students to work in pairs and cut each page in half. Pre-teach/check souvenir from both charts, square, modern art museum, canals, and boat trip from Student A's chart, and Scandinavian, jazz club, national museum, and royal palace from Student B's. Divide the class into pairs and assign a role, A or B, to each student. Hand out the relevant chart to each student and check they recognize Emma as a woman's name and Nick as a man's name.

Focus attention on the categories on the left-hand side. Elicit the questions students will need to ask about Emma and Nick:

Place                    Where did he/she go?

Time                    When did he/she go there?

Travel                  How did he/she travel?

Activities              What did he/she do?

Sightseeing           What did he/she visit?

Souvenirs             What did he/she buy?

Opinion What did he/she think of the place? Like to go again? Would he/she like to go again?

Tell students they might have to ask for the spelling of different places and review the question How do you spell  ? Remind students not to show each other their chart, but to exchange the information through speaking. Demonstrate the activity by getting one Student A to ask the first two questions about Nick and for his/her partner to give the answers. Students continue, working in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of the Past Simple and would like. Ask students to check their answers by comparing the information in their completed charts.

Ask students to complete the You column with information about a trip they went on. Elicit one or two question and answer exchanges with the you form,

e.g. Where did you go? I went to . . Students then continue, working in closed pairs. Monitor and check as before. Ask Students to check their answers by comparing the information in their completed charts. Feed back on any common errors.

EXTRA IDEAS UNITS 13 AND 14

On TB p 120 there are additional photocopiable activities to review the language from Units 13 and 14. There is a reading text with tasks, a question formation exercise, and a matching activity on everyday English. You will need to pre-teach/check suit, Without, glove, formal/inforrnal, pink, popular, fashionable, pub, designer labels, and spend for the reading text.

Don't forget!

Workbook Unit 14

Exercises 5 and 6 Pronunciation exercises to practise shifting sentence stress.

Exercise 7 In this exercise students translate sentences containing the main grammar points presented in the unit.

Word list

Ask the students to turn to p137 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.

Video

Episode 6 Close encounters

Alison, Jane's student sister, is coming to stay, so the housemates are cleaning the house. However, Ali arrives two and a half hours early and Jane is unable to meet her in town. Matt volunteers to go to the café rendezvous, Unfortunately, his car gets a flat tyre on the way and he arrives late — only to greet the wrong person. After some confusion, Ali and Matt set off home — with Matt holding the other woman's bag. They finally get home after talking to the police.

Stop and check 4 for Units 11—14 (TB p 139). Progress test 3 for Units 11—14 (TB PI 27).

ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

Workbook Unit 14

Exercises 12 and 13 Further practice of the language used when sightseeing.

              14      It's


Photocopiable material

The following material may be photocopied freely for classroom use, It may not be adapted, printed, or sold without the permission of Oxford University Press.

Extra ideas, suggestions, and practice pp106-120

Progress tests pp 121-9

Stop and checks pp 130-141


Photocopiable material

UNITS 1-14

Photocopiable


press3 •


Extra ideas Units 1-4 Revision                                       Language work

I Write questions for these answers. Reading         1 What's your nah"?

I Look at the texts about people in London. Read them               My name's Elena Majewska.


quickly and answer the questions.

I Is Lucia from London?

2          How old is Daniel?

3          Where is Todd from?

4          Who is from Japan?

5          Two people have children. Who? 6 Who isn't married?

Hi! Welcome to London

My name's LUCIA CLARKE. I'm from Brescia in Italy. I'm married. My husband's name is James. He's from London. We have a son, Daniel, and a daughter, Teresa. Daniel is twelve and Teresa is eight. James and I are both teachers at the same school. It isn't in the centre of London but it's near our house.

I'm TODD HADDING from Seattle in the United

States, I'm in London with my rock group, The Drivers, We're on tour in England, France, and Spain. I'm not married but I have a girlfriend here in London. She's a student and her name's Laura. She's beautiful!

My name's SUMIO TANAKA. I'm a businessman from Japan. My company has an office in Tokyo and in London, too. I'm married and I have two daughters.

They are students at a school in the centre of London. They are very happy here,

2       Read the interviews again. Are these sentences true (V) or false (X)?

I Lucia has two daughters.

2          Lucia is a teacher.

3          James'S school is in the centre Of London, 4 Todd is a taxi driver.

5     Laura is Todd's girlfriend.

6     Sumio's company has two offices.

7     Sumio's children aren't happy in London.

Extra ideas Units 1—4 • Photocopiable material

2

M-A-J-E-W-S-K-A.

3       7 I'm from Warsaw in Poland.

4

I'm 35.

5  7 No, I'm divorced.

6

I'm a bank manager.

7     7 It's in the centre of town.

8     7 My favourite music is jazz.

2 Practise the questions and answers with a partner.

Everyday English

Match the lines ( 1—5) with the answers (a—e).

I C] What's this in English?

2  [2 Have a good journey!

3  C] Good night.

4  C] How are you?

5  [2 Are you all right?

 Fine, thanks, b Sleep well! c Thank you. d I don't know. Sorry e Yes, I'm fine.

 

Photocopiable

            5 Practice 5      p35)

Role cards for Student A                                                  Role cards for Student B

Student A

 

 

Student B

 

NAME

TOWN / COUNTRY A HOUSE OR A FLAT

JOB

PLACE OF WORK

LANGUAGES

SPORTS

Isabella POhti

Milan, Italy flat doctor hospital

3 - Italian, French, and a little English skiing and tennis

NAME

TOWN COUNTRY

A HOUSE OR A FLAT

JOB

PLACE OF WORK

LANGUAGES

SPORTS

M0hique Duval

Carnac, France house teacher school in the town centre Z - French and English football and swimming

 

 

Student A

 

NAME

TOWN / COUNTRY

A HOUSE OR A FLAT

JOB

PLACE OF WORK

LANGUAGES

SPORTS

Mario Bellini Milan, Italy flat doctor hospital

3 - Italian, French, and a little English skiing and tennis

 

 

Student B

NAME

TOWN / COUNTRY

A HOUSE OR A FLAT

JOB

PLACE OF WORK

LANGUAGES

SPORTS

Student A

 

NAME

TOWN COUNTRY

A HOUSE OR A FLAT

JOB

PLACE OF WORK

LANGUAGES

SPORTS

Isabella Ponti Milan, Italy flat doctor hospital

3 - Italian, Frexch, anda little English skiing and tennis

 

 

Student B

NAME

TOWN / COUNTRY

A HOUSE OR A FLAT

JOB

PLACE OF WORK

LANGUAGES

SPORTS

Alain Gaultier Cathae, France house teacher

school ih the têhtre Z - French and English football and swimming

Monique Duval Carnac, Frahe¿ house teacher school in the towh eehtr¿ 2 - French and English football and swimming


Student A

 

 

Student B

 

NAME

TOWN / COUNTRY

A HOUSE OR A FLAT

JOB

PLACE OF WORK

LANGUAGES

SPORTS

Mario Bellini Milan, Italy flat doctor hospital g — Italiah, French, ahd a little Ehglišh skiing and tennis

NAME

TOWN / COUNTRY

A HOUSE OR A FLAT

JOB

PLACE OF WORK

LANGUAGES

SPORTS

Alain Gaultier Carnac, France house teacher school in the town centre 2 - French ahd Ehglieh football and swimming

 

 

Photocopiable

Photocopiable

@ Oxford University Press5 Unit 6 Suggestion (TBp41)

110 Unit6 • Photocopiable material


                7                                  p51)

@OxfordUniversity Press

Photocopiable


Adjectives

Nouns

Extra ideas Units 5—8 Revision     Language work

I Write questions for these answers. Reading       1 Do you live ina flat?

1      Read the text quickly and answer these questions.           Yes, I do. I live in a flat in the centre. I What's Nicola's job?      2 2 Where does she live?

3     What's her favourite room?    My favourite room is the living room.

4     What does she do there?        3

No, I work in an office.

Writer, Nicola Carlton, describes her favourite room

house is in the centre Of Manchester and it's about 90 years old. I work from home and my favourite room is my office. It's a beautiful room with big windows and I love it! In the office, I have my computer, two comfortable armchairs, a CD player, and a small fridge! There are photos of my three children on the walls. They're at university and I only see them in the holidays.

I get up at about 7 a.m. every morning and have a shower. I have breakfast in the office and I work at my computer all day. I don't usually go out of the office because it has everything I want — my work, music, food, and coffee! I don't have a telephone but I have email. My mother has a computer and I send messages to her every day — she loves them!

In the evening, I listen to music in the office and eat my dinner, My friends sometimes visit me and we have a glass of wine or two. I go to bed at about

11.30 p.m. — but in my bedroom, not in the office!

4

Yes, I sometimes work late.

5

No, I don't. I want to be a writer.

6

No, but I speak French and Italian.

7

Because English is important for my job.

8

I like red wine and beer.

9     7 I watch TV in the evening.


10

I have two sisters and a brother.

2      Practise the questions and answers with a partner.

Everyday English

Match the questions (1—5) with the answers (a—e).

I [2 What time is it, please?

2          C] Can I try on this jacket, please?

3          C] How much is that?

4          C] Is there a bank near here? 5 C) Is it far to the station?

2 Read the text again. Are these sentences true (V) or

a

Twelve ninety-nine. please.

false (X)?

b

About fifteen minutes.

 Nicola doesn't go out to work.

c d

Yes. Go down Kin* Road and turn right. It' five thirty.

2 Nicola's office is very light.

e

Yes, the changing rooms are over there.

3     Nicola's children don't visit her in the holidays.

4     Nicola doesn't telephone her mother.

5     Nicola sleeps in her office

3 Look at the words in bold in the text. VThat or who do they refer to?

                 9                                  p64)

Student A

                                                   Name:                                                                                4Name:                               Bob Marley

                                                                                                           Job:Job:                                                                     singer and musician

                                                   Born:                                                                                                              Born:        tq45

Country:Country: Janaica

2                                                Name:                James Dean          5              Name:    Job: actorJob:

                                                   Born:          tq31                                                                                           Born:      

Country: the United StatesCountry:


3Name:6Name: Anna Pavlova Job:               Job: dancer Born:               Born:

Country:Country. Ruggia


Student B

Name:

                                                                                                                                                                        Job:           

                                                                                                                                                                        Born:        

Country:

2Name:                                                                                                                                                                          John F. Kennedy

                                                                                                                                                                        Job:            politician

                                                                                                                                                                        Born:         tq17

Country: the United States

Name:              Job:

Country:


                10                             (TBp71)

Student A Janek flat

Student AS question

What did Paul do yesterday?

What sport/PauI/pIay/yesterday?

What/he/read?

Where/he/play the guitar?

Paul/cook a meal? He/watch a video?

He/have a bath?

He/work at his computer?


Photocopiable

Student B Paul's flat

10 •@

Student B's questions

What did Jane do yesterday? Where/ Jane/go/yesterday?

What/she/read?

Wha t/sport/she/play?

Jane/have breakfast?

She/write a letter?

She/have a bath? She/watch TV?

Press


                 Il                             (TBp81)

LISTEN TO

PLAY

BOOK

WATCH

READ

    the news                     computer games        a book                        a room                      basketball

    the piano                    a magazine                a ticket                       cards                          a newspaper

    a table                        music                        a CD                           TV                             a hotel

    chess                          a holiday                   a video                       tennis                        music

    a letter                       a film                         the news                     a cassette                  the guitar

1      Complete the dialogue with the correct form of I Complete the dialogue with the correct form of listen to, play, book, watch, or read. Use the Present listen to, play, book, watch, or read. Use the Present Simple and Past Simple. Simple and Past Simple.

A     Did you have a good weekend?  A Did you have a good weekend?

B     Yes, I played tennis with my brother on B Yes, I played tennis with my brother on Saturday and yesterday I ( I ) my Saturday and yesterday I ( 1) my

           favourite films on video. What about you?                           favourite films on video. What about you?

A     1 (2) my summer holiday on the my summer holiday on the Internet — two weeks in Portugal. Internet — two weeks in Portugal.

B     Really? That's interesting. Do you use your         B Really? That's interesting. Do you use your

             computer a lot?                                                                  computer a lot?

A    Oh yes, every day. I (3) computer A Oh yes, every day. I (3) computer games, (4) music and (5) games, (4) music and (5) newspapers,        newspapers.

B     Can you (6)        theatre tickets on the    B Can you (6)  theatre tickets on the

          Internet? I want to see a new play in London.                    Internet? I want to see a new play in London.

A    Yes, of course. It's easy. I can show you. A Yes, of course. It's easy. I can show you.

B     OK. Thanks.       B OK. Thanks.

2      Practise the dialogue in pairs.          2 Practise the dialogue in pairs.

Photocopiable

OxGd University 11

                  12                            (TB p89)


I There are three dialogues on this page. Put the lines in the correct order.

2      Where are the people in each dialogue?

3      Practise the dialogues with a partner.


Extra Ideas Units 9-12 Revision

Reading

I Work in groups and answer the questions.

I DO you like surprises?

2      Did you have a surprise on your last birthday?

3      Did you organize a surprise for a friend's birthday?

A wonderful surprise

Last Saturday was my fortieth birthday. I got up early but my husband and children stayed in bed. I thought,'That's OK. I can open my birthday cards now.' I looked in every room in the house, but nothing — no cards, presents, flowers, or chocolates. I was upset but I thought, 'It doesn't matter. I can wait.'

An hour later the postman arrived and gave me lots of envelopes- 'Fantastic — my cards!' I said, and then I saw that the letters were not for me. My husband and children got up and said, 'Happy Birthday!' but didn't give me a card or present.

Then at twelve o'clock a taxi arrived at the house. I thought it was a mistake but my husband said, 'Get in the taxi. I've got your jacket and suitcase.' We went to the airport and arrived in Paris that afternoon. We went shopping for my birthday present— a beautiful painting of the city. In the evening we had a delicious dinner — champagne, seafood, steak, and French cheese.

On Sunday we had breakfast in the oldest café in Paris, went on a boat on the River Seine, and walked along the famous streets. We arrived home on Sunday evening after a perfect weekend. The next day I asked my husband, 'How did you keep the holiday a secret?' booked it on the Internet,' he answered, 'because I know you never use the computer!'

2 Read the text. Are these sentences true (U) or false (X)?


 The writer didn't receive any presents on the morning of her birthday.

2     The postman gave the writer some birthday cards.

3     The writer didn't think the taxi was for her.

4     The writer and her husband stayed two nights in Paris.

5     The writer didn't know about the holiday because her husband booked it on the Internet.

Language work

1     Write questions about your partner's last holiday.

I Where/ go?

Where did you go?

2     go/in summer?

Did you go in summer? 3 Who/with?

4     travel/by plane?

5     Where/stay?

6     What/eat?

7     weather/good?

8     have/a good time?

2 Ask and answer the questions with a partner.

Everyday English

I Match the lines ( 1—5) with the answers (a—c).

I C] I'm sorry. I forgot your birthday.

2 C] Can you help me? I'm lost! 3 C] It's time to go to the station.

4 What would you like? 5 C] I can't understand this word.

a Where do you want to go? b You can check it in my dictionary. c Black coffee, please. d It doesn't matter. e But I can't find my ticket.


Unit 13 Suggestion (TBp96)


Student A

Student B

Photocopiable


e Oxford-University Unit 14


Extra Ideas Units 13-14 Revision  Language work

 Write questions for your partner.

Reading

 How often/go shopping for clothes?

I Read the text quickly and make a list of clothes and How often do you go shopping for clothes? colours.

2      like/today's fashions?

Clothes

Colours

guit

blue           

Do you like today's fashions?

3      What/favourite clothes shops?

4      buy clothes/on the Internet?

5      How much/spend on clothes?

6 buy/designer labels?

What are you wearing?                                                           7 What/wear for work/school/university?

The world of clothes and fashion is changing. In the 1950s, men wore a suit for work and women never went out without a hat and gloves. Today. people can wear jeans and a T-shirt in the office and young men only wear a suit for interviews or weddings. Colours are also different today. People wear blue, green, yellow, and red as well as more formal colours like black, grey, and brown. My boyfriend works in an office and today he's wearing jeans and a pink shirt!

Sports clothes are very popular today. I'm wearing jogging trousers. a T-shirt, and trainers today, but I don't go jogging! I wear them because they are fashionable and comfortable. People sometimes wear ski jackets and walking boots or trainers when they go to the pub!

Children are also very interested in fashion. In the past. parents chose and bought clothes for children and teenagers. Now, children choose their own clothes and often like to have designer labels. My sister's children are wearing Paul smith jeans, Donna Karan T-shirts and Nike trainers at the moment. I think she spends more money on clothes for them than I spend on my clothes!

I like today's fashions because they are more informal and men and women can wear the same things. I often borrow my boyfriend's trousers, shirts, and T-shirts—but he doesn't borrow my clothes!

8       Wha t/wear/now?

9       Wha t/favourite colours?

10   borrow/other people's clothes?

2 Ask and answer the questions with a partner.

Everyday English

Match the lines (1—6) with the answers (a—f).

                                                                                                                             I     I'm bored.

2                   C] I'd like to go on a tour Of the City.

3                   C) I'm hungry.

4                   When is the museum open?

5                   C] How much is it to get in to the museum? 6 C] I'm thirsty.

a Why don't you have a banana? b Five pounds for adults. c From ten until five thirty.

d             Why don't you have a glass of water?

e              That's fine. The next bus leaves at 1130. 2 Read the text again and answer these questions. f Why don't you read a book?

I Howis today's fashion different from in the 1950s?

2      What clothes and colours can people wear for work?

3      Does the writer wear sports clothes to go jogging?

4      Do parents choose clothes for today's teenagers?

5      Why are children's clothes expensive?

6      Why does the writer like today's fashions?

Extraideas Units 13—14 • Photocopiable material

Progress test 1


Exercise 1 The present tense of to be

Complete the table with the present tense of to be.

 

 

Negative

2

3

4

5

You

He/She/It we They

M not

 

 

 

8

 

Exercise 2 to be — positive, negative, and questions

Complete the sentences with the correct form of to be.

I I 'M from Manchester in England. 2 you a student?

3       My brothera doctor.

4       My parentsfrom London. They're from Brighton.

5       Are you married? No, I

6       My sister and Ifrom Japan.

7       your parents from the United States?

8       Jane            a doctor. She's a teacher.

9       Is he a taxi driver? Yes, he

10   The winefrom Spain, It's from Portugal,

11   your teacher from England?

 

10

Exercise 3 Questions

Match a line in A with a line in B to make a question. Then find an answer in C.

 

 

c

What

Where

HOW

How much

How old

Who

is your daughter? is a sandwich? is Sally?

are you from? is his name? are you?

I'm fine, thanks.

Lyons, in France.

Mr Brown.

She's my daughter.

£1.75.

She's 18.

Exercise 4 Word order

Write the words in the correct order.

I English / is / What / this I in / ?

What ig this in English?

2      wife / is / This / Peter's

3      phone / is / What / their / number / ?

4      the / house / have / We / a / in / country

5      your / you / do / How ] spell / surname / ?

6      you / Do / Spanish / like I wine / ?

7      well / I / speak / French / don't / very

8      car / don't / a / We / have / German

9     
Chinese / they / Do / eat / food / ?

 

8


Exercise 5 a or an?

Complete the sentences with a or an.

I It's an American city. 2 He's actor.

3     Are youteacher?

4     I have       Italian car.

5 We don't havebig house.

6 I haveEnglish friend. 7 She's  student.

8 They don't have computer, 9 She's Australian doctor.

10 Is he            businessman?

Exercise 6 has/have

Complete the sentences with the correct form of have.

1              have a brother and a sister.

2              a small farm in Wales. 3 I like Chinese food but wea Chinese restaurant in town.

4                    Theya flat in London.

5                    I'm not married but I     a lot of friends. 6 John  a new computer.

7 theya big family? 8 My sistera dog and a cat.

9 youa dictionary?

Exercise 7 Present Simple

Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb in brackets.

1 My husband and I live (live) in the COuntry. 2 1(not like) swimming.

3      They(drink) French wine.

4      What sports -the children   (like)?

5      We(work) in a hospital.

6     


You(not like) hamburgers.

7      How many languages          you (speak)?

8your and your family(speak) German? 9 Helen and Dave(not work) in

London.

10                               Where      you      (live)?

11                               you(eat) Chinese or Italian food?

 

10

Exercise 8 Subject pronouns and possessive adjectives

Choose the correct word.

I My /Ø'm from Italy.

2 Is this you / your dictionary? 3 My brother is a doctor. His / He 's 27.

4      This is my mother. He/ She 's a teacher.

5      Do you like we/ ourhouse?

6      I'm Anna and this is my/ Ihusband.

7      Is this your daughter? What's her/ his name?

8      My father is from Poland. His / Her name's Arek.

9      What are they / their names?

 

8

Exercise 9 Possessive 's

Tick (V) the correct sentence. 1This is Davids car.

 This is David's car.

Peter's wife is American.

 Peter is wife is American.

3      What's your teacher name?

b  What's your teacher's name?

4      The children's names are Emma and Simon.  [2 The childrens names are Emma and Simon.

5       C] Mr Browns car is American.

 [2 Mr Brown's car is American.

6      Her husband name is Paolo, b Her husband's name is Paolo.

 

5


Exercise 10 Numbers

Write the numbers in words.

1        17 seventeeh

2        29

3        37

4        43

5        59

6        62

7        74

8        88

9        91


10   100

Exercise 11 Word groups

I Put the words in the correct column.

teaehe+ parent sandwich actor beer sister hamburger bank manager daughter wine son chocolate shop assistant ice-cream police officer coffee orange tea Coca-Cola husband waiter

Family

Drinks

teacher      

 

 

20

 

TOTAL

Photocopiable

1—5 Progresstestl

Progress test 2

Exercise 1 Present Simple and frequency adverbs Exercise 3 there Ware and prepositions of place Write complete sentences with the words in brackets.

I I/ go to bed late (usually)


7 Helen / go windsurfing (sometimes)

 

6

Exercise 2 Object pronouns Choose the correct word.

I My daughter visited@/ my last month.

2                    My son lives near you. Do you know he / him ?

3                    We bought a video but we didn't watch it / them.

4                   


My daughter is a doctor. This is a photo of him/ her. 5 Our homework is very difficult. Can you help we/ us?

6      We phoned Mum and Dad last week but we didn't see them / they.

7     
You are very nice. I like you / your.

Write sentences about the picture.

I a TV / the room

There's a TV in the room.

2      


two books / the table

3      


a lamp / the sofa

4      


three pictures / the walls

5      


a cat / the table

 

10

6      


a magazine / the bag


Exercise 4 The past tense of to be

Complete the table with the past tense of to be.

 

 

 

Negative

2

3

4

5

You

He/She/lt

We

They

was

wasn't

 

 

8

 

Exercise 5 do, was, and did

Complete the sentences with the verbs in the box.

do / does

was / were

did

 NThere does he work?

2you like French food?

3     Where           you last night?

4     What               you do last weekend?

5     she live in New York now? 6 you go skiing last year?

7      Whenhe born?

8      Weat home yesterday.

9      How many childrenthey have now?

 

8

Exercise 6 Past Simple

Complete the sentences with the Past Simple Of the verbs in brackets. There are regular and irregular verbs. I She                played  (play) tennis yesterday.

(not work) at my computer yesterday.

3 We(buy) a new video recorder last

7      You(not take) the painting to an expert.

8     


you(eat) in the hotel? 9 The children(do) their homework on their computer.

 

8

Exercise 7 Negatives

Write the sentences in the negative.

I L work in an office.

I d0h'twork in ah Office.

2        The film is very good.

3        There's a CD player in the car.

4        She goes to work by car.

5        We go shopping in town.

6        There are a lot of hotels in this area.

7        The weather was very hot.

8        My children were born in the US.

9        Iwas born in 1989.

10   David played baseball at school,

Il I had a big lunch.

 

10

Exercise 8 Days of the week

Complete the days in order.

Days: Monday


month.

4     WQ1ere you (go) on holiday last year?


5     They(stay) at home last weekend.

6     He(see) his friends last night.


Exercise 9 Dates

Write the dates in words.

1     5/5           the fifth ot May

2     1/2     

3 19/6

4      3/8

5      31/12

6      12/10

7 17/4 8 5/1 9 7/7

Exercise 10 Prepositions of time

Write the correct preposition, in, or at.

the evening 2           Monday

3                         seven o'clock

4                         Sunday morning

5                         the afternoon

6                         five thirty

7                         the weekend

 

6

Exercise 11 Words that go together Match a verb in A with a line in B.

Exercise 12 Which one is different? the different word.

 newsagent supermarket@chemist

2                    France German Italy Portugal

3                    shower CD player TV video recorder

4                    ice hockey swimming sailing skiing 5 twenty-second twenty-nine thirteenth ninth

6     writer painter footballer singer

7     watched ate got took

8     swimming windsurfing sailing walking

9     floor kitchen wall window

 

8

 

 

8

Exercise 13 Adjectives Match the opposites.

 

 

 

new early small expensive fast cold lovely

old horrible stow hot late cheap

 

 

 

6

Progress test 3

UNITS 11-14

Exercise 1 Word order

Put the words in the correct order.

I fast/ you/ Can/ swim / ? Cah you MM fast?

2         She/ long/ hair/ fair / has

3         tour/ the long/ How / does / bus / last / ?

4         radio/ listen [to/ like/ you / Would/ to/ the / ?

5         Can/ tell/ please/ you/ me / the/ time/ ?

6         car/ want/ They/ to/ a/ buy/ new

7         like/ would/ to / What / you/ drink/ ?

8         and/ a/ is / He / wearing / jeans / T-shirt

9         weekend / going / are / Where / you / next?

10     bed/ you/ Why/ don't/ go/ early/ to/ ?

Il agent/ collected / We our / the/ tickets / travel / from

Exercise 2 can and carit

Look at the information in the table and complete the sentences with can or can't and a verb.

 

use a computer

ride a horse

play the guitar

cook

James

Helen

Sue

 

 

 

x

1     Helen cah ride a horse but James and Sue can't.

2     James and Helen but Sue can.

3     James can use a computer, but he

4     Everybody

5     Helen and Sue      ? No, they can't.

6     Who         ? Only Helen

•a

Exercise 3 want, like, and would like Tick G/ ) the correct sentence.

1     A [Z What would you like for dessert? C] What do you like for dessert?

B      Ice-cream, please.

2      [2 Would you like a glass of wine? C] Do you like wine?

B      Yes, I love it.

3     A [2 1 want to send an email, please.

Cl I'd want to send an email, please.

B      That's fine. Try computer number 3.

4      C] Would you like to listen to some music? C] Do you like listening to music?

B      That's a nice idea.

5     A C] I like to buy these postcards, please.

C] I'd like to buy these postcards, please. B Two pounds fifty, please.

 What sports would you like doing?

B I love football and squash.

6     A      What sports do you like doing?

Exercise 4 Present Continuous

Complete the sentences with the Present Continuous form of the verbs in the box.

fead write wear rain have work enjoy leave drive

I What are you reading                          ? It's a love story.

2 He can't go to the cinema because he

late.

work early because I don't

feel well.

4        In this photo sheshorts and a

T-shirt.

5        can't talk to you now. Ithe car. 6 it ? NO, the weather is lovely today.

7 Where's Liz? Shea shower. 8 youyour holiday? Yes, everything is great.

9 The children        a letter to their grandparents.

 

8

Exercise 5 Present Simple and Continuous

Complete the sentences with the Present Simple or the

Present Continuous form of the verbs in brackets.

I I usually walk      (walk) to work but this morning 1 'M driving (drive) to my office.

2   1(not see) my parents very often but they(stay) with me at the moment.

3   We usually(have) lunch at home but today we    (eat) in a nice restaurant.

4   Whyyou(wear) jeans for work today? You usually(wear) more formal clothes.

5   My friends and I(learn) French at the moment. We (like) it very much.

6   My sister           (live) in a flat in London but she (travel) in Europe at the moment,

Photocopiable

 

10


Exercise 6 Past Simple and Present Continuous for future

Write positive and negative sentences, using the verbs.

I I get up early

I got up ear!yyesterday.

I'm not getting up earlytomorrow.

2       she / cook dinner

yesterday.

tomorrow.

3       we / work late yesterday.

tomorrow.

4       they / leave home early yesterday.

tomorrow.

5       I / go to bed late yesterday.

tomorrow.

6       you / Stay at home yesterday.

tomorrow.

7       Richard / see his doctor

yesterday.

tomorrow.

 

12

Exercise 7 Negatives

I I can draw well. I can't draw yell.

2        She wants to sell her house.

3        They like sightseeing.

4        He can swim,

5        He works in a bank.

6        We walk to work every day.

7        1'm watching this film.

8        The children are doing their homework.

9        You are playing very well.

10    We're staying in the hotel fora week.

Il We had a nice meal at the restaurant.

12     You collected the tickets yesterday.

13     Angela saw her family last week

 

12

Exercise 8 am/ is/are, do/does/did

Complete the sentences with a verb from the box.

amnm not do/don't

is/isn't did/didn't

are/aren't

does/doesn't

1   I am watching TV.

2   My husband              going skiing next month. 3 Where           the bus tour leave from?

4       How often you travel by plane?

5       They usually go to Italy on holiday but they going there this year.

6      


We had lunch in a restaurant but we            enjoy it.

7       Why don't we go out? Itraining now.

8       Are you using your computer? No, I

9       They live in Spain but theyspeak Spanish very well.

10   1catching the plane at seven thirty.

Il Does Paula like skiing? No, she

12                              you have a good weekend?

13                              you enjoying the party?

 

12

Exercise 9 Which one is different?

@the different word.

           ank chemist newsagent supermarket

2        wine coffee mineral water cake

3        cheese ham meal vegetables

4        soup chocolate cake ice-cream apple pie

5        plane airport ferry train

6        farmer grandmother interpreter architect

7        passport ticket travel agent stamp

8        shoes shorts jeans trousers

9        T-shirt dress jacket coat

10   black red grey long

11   dessert waiter main course side order

12   film photo interview camera

13    post office stamp letter email

 

12

Exercise 10 Words that go together

Match a verb in A with a line in B.

 

 

13

 

100

 

Stop and check 1

Correct the mistakes

Each sentence has a mistake. Find it and correct it.

1        Hello, 4 John. Hello, I'M John.

2        What's you name?

3        My name are Ana.

4        This Helen Smith,

5        Is a book

6        Where you are from?

7        1'm am from Spain.

8        He's a businessman. Her name's James.

9        What's she job? She's a doctor.

10    He no is a teacher. He's a student.

I I How old you?

12      Is she from London? Yes, she's.

13      Is hea shop assistant? No, he not.

14      Are you from France? No, I amn't.

15      He's phone number is 772541.

16      My teacher and I is 30.

 

15

my/your, he "she /they, his /her

Circle the correct word.

My / I name's Karen.

2      He's from Japan. His / Her name's Hiro.

3      Helen and Sally are in a pop group. They/ She are on tour.

4      What's you / your address?

5      This is Linda. Her / She 's from Manchester. 6 Where are the students? They're / You're in London.

7 Mr Evans is from London. She's / He's a businessman.

 

6

Questions and answers

I Match the questions (1—8) and the answers (a—h).

I What's your job?a No, she isn't, 2 [2 Where's he from?b Mr Brown. 3 Is she a shop assistant?c Glasgow, in Scotland 4 [2 What's his name?d I'm27. 5 How old are you?e No, we aren't. 6 [2 How are you? f I'm a student

g       Fine, thanks.

      7          Are you married?

h       It's a camera. 8 What's this is English?

•a


Photocopiable

@ Oxford University Press             


2 Look at the identity card and write the questions.

NAME: CITY :

JOB : ACE: PHONE NUMBER: MARRIED? :

Emma Cartwright

Liverpool, England Police officer

29

0151 876 1290

Yes

1 What's her hame?

Her name's Emma Cartwright.

2

She's from Liverpool in England.

3

She's a police officer.

4

She's 29.

5

It's 0151 876 1290.

6

Yes, she is.

 

10

Negatives

Write the sentences in the negative.

I It's from Spain.

It isn't from Spain. 2 She's a nurse.

3      Karl is from Canada.

4      Julie is 29.

5      I'm married.

6      Jim and Sue are students.

7      They are in New York.

 

12

Plurals

Write the sentences in the plural.

I It's a book.

They're books.

2      I'm English.

3      It's a sandwich.

4      He's a student.

5      She's from the United States.

6      I'm not on tour.

7      Is she a doctor?

 

12

Numbers

1     Match the numbers in A with the words in B.

B

6

2

5

8

4

9

3

10

7

five two

six nine eight one four three ten

Units1-3 •

2     Write the numbers in words.

 

I 12 twelve

5 14

2 11

6 30

3 28

7 13

4 20

8 15

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

 

 

Vocabulary

I Put the words in the correct column.

deee•F phe•tetfaph nurse sandwich student book teacher television businessman shop assistant camera taxi driver bag police officer computer hamburger

 

14

2 Write the countries.

TRANSLATE

Translate the sentences into your language. Translate the ideas, not word by word.

I What's your name?

2      How are you?

3      1'm fine, thanks.

4      What's this in English?

5      He's a taxi driver.

6      His name's John. Her name's Karen.

7      How old are you?

8      1'm twenty-six.

9      They aren't married.

10   Is she from Spain? Yes, she is.

Photocopiable


I aclodstn                    Scotland

2                    ajpna   

3                    auitasarl               4 rcafne              5 apnsi              

6     Inaegnd        

7     ltY1a


8     het tduine tesats

9     libarz

TOTAL

Stop and check 2

UNITS 4-6                       


Correct the mistakes

Each sentence has a mistake. Find it and correct it.

I *key teacher is from Wales. Their teacher is from Wales.

2        My sisters husband is a doctor.

3        The childrens live in London.

4        He have a new car.

5        We car is Italian.

6        How old have you?

7        lam like tennis.

8        1 no speak German very well.

9        She live in Tokyo.

10     We have a house big.

1 1 They not like Chinese food.

12      Where she work?

13      My husband don't workin an office.

14      Does they speak French?

15      sports do she like?

16      We don't never drink wine.

 

15

Questions and negatives I Write questions.

I Where / you / live? Where do you live?

2        How/ you/ spell / your name?

3        How many / sisters/ he / have?

4        What/ food/ she / like?

5        Where / you / have lunch?

6        What/ music / you/ like?

7        How many / languages / they / speak?

8        What time / you/ getup?

9        What/ drinks / the children / like?

10    What time / Helen / go to bed?

Il Where / your teacher / come from?

 

10

2       Write the statements as questions and negatives.

I Julie is Richard's sister.

Is Julie Richard's sister?

Julie isn't Richard's sister.

2 They have a house in the centre.


 Units4—6


3      


He speaks three languages.  Times and prices


Write the times and prices.

6        He goes to bed late.


7        We have lessons at 7.30.

8        Your parents drink wine.

9        She speaks English well.

10    He cooks lunch.

 

18

Prepositions

Complete the sentences with the prepositions in the box.

in

on

by

at

 We live in thecity centre. 2 I go to work8.30.

3               Do you work    the evening?

4               The children go to school         bus.

5               He worksa hospital.

6               We don't get up early the weekend, 7 My parents eat in a restaurantFriday evening.

8               I don't go to schoolSaturday.

9               We don't watch TVthe afternoon.

10           They have lunch one o'clock. 11 I sometimes go to worktaxi.

 

10

5

7


34


6

95p


8

£12.72


910

£68.41


1112


Photocopiable

134 Units4—6 •                                  2

   Vocabulary — countries and nationalities                      Vocabulary — word groups

 

Nationality

England

Portugal

Italy

Brazil

Japan

English

Spanish

German

American

Fed studio beautiful skiing college big office funny classroom favourite tennis nice flat swimming farm small school great restaurant football university

 

8

Complete the table.                                                           Put the words in the correct column. Each column has a different number of words.

 

20

Vocabulary — words that go together

Match a line in A with a line in B.

 

100

 

 

watch listen to get up drink work stay go

walk play

late coffee shopping music the piano a shower in an office to work at home TV

TRANSLATE

Translate the sentences into your language. Translate the ideas, not word by word.

I John is Diana's husband,

2     What's your friend's address?

3     My wife has a good job.

4     We have two children.

5     1 like swimming.

6     We don't like Chinese food.

7     'Do you live in the country?' 'Yes, I do.'

8     He leaves school at four thirty,

9     'Does Graham walk to work?' 'No, he doesn't.'

10 We never go out in the evening.

Stop and check 3


Correct the mistakes

Each sentence has a mistake. Find it and correct it.

I Do you like dogs? Yes, I love ,

Do tou like dogs? Yes, I love them.

2         My son is a student and I don't see her very often.

3         That's a photo Of my children and my.

4         She lives in a old house.

5         There is three magazines on the table.

6         There aren't some good restaurants in this area.

7         There aren't a computer in the living room.

8         Are therea nice shops in the city centre?

9         lam born in 1985.

10     Where was you born?

Il The weather isn't very good yesterday.

12     She play tennis yesterday morning.

13     She goed on holiday last week

14     Where did you go ski?

15     What did you had for breakfast?

16    
Did you buyed a newspaper yesterday?

 

15

Questions and answers

Match the questions (I—I I ) with the answers (a—k).

              How are you?

2              C] What did you have for lunch?

3              C] Where are my keys?

4              I.That time did you get up?

5              How old are your children?

6              C] How many children do you have? 7 C] How much was your camera?

8               C] Why do you want to learn English?

9               C] Do you like jazz?

10           [2 How do you travel to work? Il C] Who was Agatha Christie?

a At about seven thirty. g She was an English writer. b Fine. thanks. h Because I need it for my job. c About a hundred pounds. Two- a boy and a girl. d Yes, I love it, Twelve and fifteen, e By car. k Pizza and salad. fon the table.

 

10

there is / are

Complete the sentences with the correct form of there is lare.

1      There is a new computer in my school.

2a Thai restaurant near here.

3     twenty students in my group.

4     There's a TV, buta video recorder.

5a new cooker in the kitchen ?

6any pictures on the walls?

7 There are some nice shops, but any supermarkets.


Past Simple                                                                       was / were / did / diddt


Complete the text with the past Simple form of the verbs in brackets. There are regular and irregular verbs.

Elvis Presley (l)            (be) born on 8 January 1935. (live) with his parents in Tupelo,

Mississippi for the first thirteen years of his life. In 1948, they (3) (go) to Memphis because his father (4)(want) to find a job. Elvis

(5) (not like) his new home or school, but he (6)(love) music. He (7)(leave) school in 1953 and (8) (work) in different jobs. Two years later, Elvis (9) (join) RCA Records and in very little time he ( 10) (be) famous for his music, dancing and films. He

(11)(have) hundreds of hits including 'Love me Tender', 'Hound Dog', 'Blue Suede Shoes', and 'Jailhouse Rock'.

 

 

 

20

 

Irregular verbs

Write the Past Simple form of these irregular verbs. I go went   5 buy

2      see                  6 take

3      get  7 say

4      do              8 eat

Complete the sen tences with the verbs in the box.

was

wasn't

were

weren't

did

didn't

1                1 wag 25 on my last birthday.

2               


The wea thercold-and wet last week. 3you on holiday last week?' 'Yes, I was.' 4 you get up early yesterday?

5     Weat work yesterday. It was a holiday.

6     I love holidays, but Ihave a good time last year.

7     I went to see my friend but sheat home. 8 'Were they at the party?' 'No, they

9 'Did he go swimming yesterday?' 'No, he

 

8

Questions and negatives

Write the statements as questions and negatives.

 He's a doctor.

Is he a doctor?

ge isn't a doctor.

2      There's a CD player in the living room.

3      She was born in 1980.

4      He was a good student.

5      We stayed at home last weekend.

6      You went to bed early last night.

 

10


Vocabulary                                                                       TRANSLATE

Put the words in the correct column.                                             Translate the sentences into your language. Translate the ideas, not word by word.

geed sailing painter lamp cheap princess baseball kitchen new writer hot dancing shower musician skiing cooker singer tennis bed delicious fast president armchair cards lovely

I 'Why do you want to leave your job?' 'Because I don't like it.'

2       How many brothers and sister do you have?

Adjectives

Rooms and furniture

People and jobs

Sports and activities

good

 

 

 

3       sWhat's this?' 'It's my new English book.'

4       There aren't any Spanish restaurants in my town.

5       Where were you born?

6       She was a singer.

7       1 went swimming yesterday morning.

 

 

 

24


8       We saw our friends last week.

TOTAL

9       What did you do yesterday?

10   He didn't have a good time on holiday,

Photocopiable

7—10 •                                                              3@

Stop and check 4

UNITS 11-14


Correct the mistakes

Each sentence has a mistake. Find it and correct it.

I He hyes lunch at home. He has lunch at home.

2          1 can speaking French.

3          She want to send an email.

4          'I like a coffee, please.' 'Here you are.'

5          'Do you like to come to my party?' 'Yes, please.'

6          1'd like shopping,

7          We learning English.

8          What do you wearing?

9          He no working today.

10      1'm do my homework now.

Il That's my father over there. He wears a black hat.

12     Where are you coming from?

13     We goon holiday next month.

14     Do you work tomorrow?

15     We haved a good time last weekend.

Photocopiable

16     How much did you stay in Spaili?

 

15

Questions and answers

I Match the questions ( 1—9) with the answers (a—i).

      Do you sell computer magazines? 2      What would you like to start?

3                     Can you tell me the time, please?

4                         Why don't you sit down and relax?

5                     [2 What's the problem?

6Where can I buy a phone card?

7How long does the bus tour take?

8Can I help you?

9When is the tourist office open?

a               I'm lost. b                Try the newsagent c               From nine o'clock to seven o'clock every day. d  Ifs two fifteen. e The soup, please. f  No, I'm sorry, we don't. g      I'm just looking, thanks. h      About an hour.

 

8

                     That's a good idea.

2 Complete the questions with a question word or words,

1      What 's your name?

My name's Victoria Simpson.

2      are you doing?

I'm writing to my friend.

3      are you going on holiday?

We're going to Italy.

4      did you travel?

We travelled by train and bus.

5      did you return early?

Because the weather was bad.

6      did you go on holiday with?

I went with my parents,

7      do you get up?

At seven thirty.

8      did your car cost?


About £5,000.

                                                             11—14 Stopandcheck4


9      brothers and sisters do you have?

Two brothers and a sister.

10  is your daughter? She's 15. Her birthday is in June. 11 is your party? It's on Saturday 20th of July.

 

10

can / want / like / would like

Choose the correct word.

 'O/ Wouldyou want a drink?' 'Yes, please.'

2      'Do you like Italian food?' 'Yes, I like / do.'

3      'Do/ Would you like to watch a video? •That's a good idea.'

4      I'd like / I like to buy a computer, please.

5      My father wants / wantto learn English.

6      You can buying/ buy stamps in a post office.

7      She doesn't / don't like dogs.

8      I cant / can't speak German very well. 9 Do they like saill sailing?

10 He can / cans use a computer.

We like / We'd likeour new house.

 

10

Present Simple and Continuous

Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb

in brackets.

I He usually goes          (go) to work by bus.

2        We 're having (have) lunch at the moment.

3        She(phone) her parents every day.

4        She's on the beach and she(wear)

a swimsuit.

5        you usually               (get up) late at weekends?

6        John(have) a birthday party every

year.

7        Don't talk to Linda. She(do) her homework at the moment.

8        Where are Mum and Dad? They(sit)

9        The children always(watch) TV in the evening.

10    they              (work) at home today?

I l Put your jacket on. It(rain).

12 How often                  you                (go) to the theatre?

 

 

10

Present Continuous for future

Complete the sentences with a verb and a noun from the boxes. Use the Present Continuous.

Verbs:

travel collect getmarried meet go have

Nouns:

heel restaurant cinema friends church train tickets

1     We 're staying ina hotel in Edinburgh next month.

2     My boyfriend and Iin a beautiful next month.

3     youthe

from the travel agent tomorrow morning?

4     Tomorrow is Saturday. Imy

in town.

5     They               dinner in a new

tomorrow.

6     She to France by next week.

in the garden.

7     We  to the next weekend to see the new Brad Pitt film.

 

12

Past, present, and future

Complete the dialogue with the correct form of the verbs in brackets. Use the Present Simple, Present Continuous, Present Continuous for future, and Past Simple.

                   (I)             you            (do) tomorrow?

(play) tennis with my brother.

A    Really? (3)you(play) every week?

B     Only in the summer. But my brother (4)(play) two or three times every week — he's very good. He (5) (start) when he was a child, but (6) I

(not like) sport very much then. (7)you in sport?

(go) swimming every week, and windsurfing in the summer. I (9) (go) to Australia last year.

B (10)              you           (have) a good time?

A     Yes, it was fantastic. I was with some friends and we

(11) (travel) to different places. We

(12) (visit) Sydney and Melbourne.

B     (13)you (go) to Australia for your next holiday?

A    No, we (14)(go) to the US. My sister

(15)(live) in Florida and we ( 16)  (stay) with her for two weeks in

August.

B     That's great! Have a good time!

A Thanks very much.

 

15

Vocabulary — word groups


Put the words in the correct column.

 

hamb€f€ef red fish bicycle jeans fries yellow jacket ham plane grey jumper underground cheese steak train white T-shirt trousers brown ship

 

 

Clothes

Colours

Transport

hamburger

 

 

 

 

 

20

 

 

 

100

 

TRANSLATE

Translate the sentences into your language. Translate the ideas, not word by word.

I I can't play the guitar.

2    Can I help you?

3    'Would you likea sandwich?' 'No, thank you.'

4    1'd like to go to the theatre this evening.

5    We're learning English.

6    What are you reading?

7    Do you read the newspaper every day?

8    We're flying to New York tomorrow.

9    What are you doing next weekend?


Answer keys

Extra ideas Units 13—14

Extra ideas Units 1—4

Language work

I Possible answers:

Reading

2

What's your favourite room?

Reading

             she isn't.

3

you work from home?

 

 

 

suit hat gloves jeans T-shirt shirt sports clothes jogging trousers trainers ski jacket wal king boots trousers

blue green yellow red black grey brown pink

          No,                                                                          Do

2 He's 12. 4 Do you work late? 1 3 He's from the United States. 5 Do you like your job?

4   Sum io          6 Do you speak German?

5   Lucia and Sumio         7 Why do you want to learn English?

6   Todd             8 What drinks do you like?

9 What do you do in the evening?

false 4 false 7 false 10 How many brothers and sisters do 2 true 5 true you have?

     3 false           6 true

Everyday English

Language work                                                      I d 2 e 3 a 4c 5b

1 2 Howdo you spell your surname?

3   Where are you from?

 How old are you?


Extra ideas Units 9-12 5 Are you married?

6 What's your job?

 

 

 

 

7 Where's your bank?

Reading

 

2

 People wear informal clothes and

8 What's your favourite music?

I Students' own answers.

 

 

colours today.

2 people can wear jeans and T-shirts

Everyday English

I d 2c 3b 4a 5e

2 1 true              3 true

      2 false            4 false

Language work

5 true

 

for work. They can wear blue, red, yellow, red and pink.

3 No, she doesn't. She wears sports clothes because they are fashionable and comfortable,

 

1 3 Who did you go with?

 

4 No, they don't. Children choose

Extra ideas Units 5—8

 

5 Where did you stay?

5 Children's clothes are expensive

Reading

6 What did you eat?

because they like to have designer

 

7 Was the weather good?

labels.

I I She's a writer.

2 She lives in Manchester.

8 Did you have a good time?

6 She likes today's fashions because

3 Her favourite room is her office.

 

they are more informal and men

4 She has breakfast, works, listens to

Everyday English

and women can wear the same things.

music, and eats her dinner in her office.

I d 2 a 3 e 4c 5b

 

2 1 true                3 false         5 false

 

Language work

     2 true            4 true

 

3 What are your favourite clothes shops?

3 it — Nicola's room

 

4 Do you buy clothes on the Internet?

them — Nicola's children

 

5 How much do you spend on clothes?

her — Nicola's mother

 

6 Do you buy designer labels?

she — Nicola's mother

 

7 What do you wear for work/school]

them — email m essages

 

university?

me — Nicola

 

8      What are you wearing now?

9      What are your favourite colours?

10  Do you borrow other people's

4   Did you travel by plane?  their own clothes.

clothes?

Everyday English

If 2e 3 a 4c 5b


Progress test 2

Progress test 1

                                                                                Exercise 8                                                                                                                                

 

 

2 your

6

 

Exercise 1

 

3 He's

7 her

Exercise 1

2    are      aren't

 

4 She

8 His

2 He never works late.

3        is      isn't

4        are  aren't

 

5 our

9 their

3 1 sometimes go to work by car. 4 My son always has lunch at school.

5     are       aren't

 

Exercise [1]

 

5 She usually sees her friends after

Exercise 2

 

2a 3b 4a 5b

6b

school.

6 1 never buya newspaper.

2 Are

7 Are

Exercise [2]

 

7 Helen sometimes goes windsurfing.

3 is

8 tsn t

2 twenty-nine

7 seventy-four

Exercise 2

4    aren't

5    'm not

9      is

10  isn't

3 thirty-seven

8 eighty-eight

2 him                         5 us

6 are

11

4 forty-three

9 ninety-one

3 it                             6 them

Exercise 3

 

5    fifty-nine

6    sixty-two

10 one hundred

4 her                         7 you

'Where are you from?' 'Lyons, in France.'

Exercise 11

 

Exercise 3

'How are you?' 'I'm fine, thanks.'

 

 

2 There are two books on the table.

Jobs

Family

Food

Drinks

actor bank manager shop assistant police officer waiter

parent sister daughter son husband

sandwich hamburger chocolate ice-cream orange

beer

Wine coffee tea

Coca-Cota

'How much isa sandwich?' '£1.75.'3 There's a lamp next to the sofa.

'How old is your daughter?' 'She's 18.'4 There are three pictures on the walls.

'VThO is Sally?' 'She'S my daughter,'5 There's a cat under the table. 6 There's a magazine in the bag.

Exercise 4

Exercise 4 2 This is Peter's wife.

3  


What is their phone number?2 were        weren't

4   We have a house in the country.                3 was      wasn't

5   How do you spell your surname?     4 were weren't 6 Do you like Spanish wine?5 were weren't 7 I don't speak French very well.

8 We don't have a German car.       Exercise 5 9 Do they eat Chinese food?

2   Do     6 Did

3   were 7 was

Exercise 5                                                                                                                                                                            8 were

2 an                                                                                                                                                         5 Does                       9 do

                        6 an                9 an

4 an                                     10 a                                                                                                        Exercise 6

2    didn't work     6 saw

3    bought             7 didn't take

Exercise 6                                                                                                                                             4 did ... go                  8 Did eat

2   has     6 has      5 stayed 9 did

3   don't have       7 Do .have

4   have 8 has     Exercise 7

5   have   9 DOhave                The film isn't very good.

2

3 There isn't a CD player in the car.

Exercise 7                                                                                                                                            4 She doesn't go to work by car,

2 don't like           7 do speak            5 We don't go shopping in town. 3 drink      8 Do speak            6 There aren't a lot of hotels in this

4   do like               9 don't work

5   work  10 do ...live           7 The weather wasn't very hot.

6   don't like          11 Do. eat             8 My children weren't born in the US,

Exercise 8Exercise 6

Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday,2 She cooked dinner yesterday. She isn't Saturday, Sunday              Exercise 1               cooking dinner tomorrow.

3 We worked late yesterday. We aren't

2 She has long, fair hair.

Exercise 9                                                              3 How long does the bus tour last? 4 working They left late home tomorrow.early yesterday. They

2   the first of February          Would you like to listen to the radio?   aren't leaving home early tomorrow. 4

3   the nineteenth of June   Can you tell me the time, please?   5 I went to bed late yesterday. ['m not 5

6

4   the third of August         They want to buy a new car.            going to bed late tomorrow.

7 What

5   the thirty-first of December would you like to drink? 6 You stayed at home yesterday. You 8 He

6   the twelfth of October   is wearing jeans and a T-shirt. or    aren't staying at home tomorrow7 the seventeenth of April       is wearing a T-shirt and jeans.        7 Richard saw his doctor yesterday. He He

9 Where

8   the fifth of January        are you going next weekend?          isn't seeing his doctor tomorrow.

10

9   the seventh of July             Why don't you go to bed early?

Il We collected our tickets from the travel agent.               Exercise 7 Exercise 10

2               She doesn't want to sell her house. 2 on 4 on 6 at Exercise 2 3 They don't like sightseeing.

3               at            5 In        7 at               4 He can't swim.

2 can't play the guitar

5               He doesn't work in a bank 3 can't ride a horse can't play the guitar

6               We don't walk to go sailing       5 Can cook           not watching this film.

Exercise 11                                                               4 can use a computer                                                                               work every day.

7               I'm

8               The children aren't doing their

watch a video                                                       6 can ride a horse

homework.

listen to a CD                                                                                                                                           9 You aren't playing very well.

play cards Exercise 3 10 We aren't staying in the hotel for a work stay in in a a chalethospital 2 Do you like wine? week.


cook a meal                                                        3 1 want to send an email, please.                    I l We didn't have a nice meal at the

eat in restaurants                                               4 Would you like to listen to some                         restaurant.

music? 12 You didn't collect the tickets drink a beergood time 5 1'd like to buy these postcards, please. yesterday. have

6 What sports do you like doing?                                13 Angela didn't see her family last week.

Exercise 12

Exercise 4

2   German (The others are countries.)            Exercise 8

2

3   shower (The others are electrical                's working             6 Is raining

3

     appliances.)                                                            'm leaving             7 's having                            2 is                  6 didn't          10 am

4   ice hockey (The others go with go, not     's wearing              8 Are . enjoying   3 does    7 isn't     Il doesn't 4 play.) 'm driving           9 are writing          4 do        8 'm not 12 Did

5

5   aren't 9 don't   13 5 twenty-nine (The others are ordinals,)   Are

6   footballer (The others are jobs in the         Exercise 5

Arts.)  2 don't see are staying 7 watched (The others are irregular.) 3 have are eating

8   walking (The others are water sports,)      4 are wearing wear

9   kitchen (The others are parts of a               5 are learning like room,)

6 lives 's travelling

Exercise 13

early — late small — big expensive — cheap fast — slow Cold — hot lovely — horribl e

 

Photocopiable


Exercise 9

2    cake (The others are drinks.)

3    meal (The others are types of food.)

4    soup (The others are desserts.)

5    airport ( The others are forms Of transport. )

6    grandmother (The others are jobs.)

7 stamp (The others are to do with travelling. )

8     shoes ( The others are worn on the legs.)

9     dress (The others are items of clothing for both men and women.)

10  long (The others are colours.)

Il waiter (The others are parts of a meal. )

12                 interview (The others are to do with  taking photos. )

13                 email (The others are to do with sending letters.) Exercise 10

watch a video read a magazine chat to a friend wear shorts play chess book a holiday catch a plane change money go sightseeing have a good time pack your bags arrive in Paris make a cake

Stop and check 1

Correct the mistakes

2 What's your name? 3 My name is Ana.

4    This is Helen Smith.

5    It's a book.

6    Where are you from?

7    I'm from Spain. / I am from Spain. 8 He's a businessman. His name's James.

9    What's her job? She's a doctor.

10              He isn't a teacher. He's a student. Il How old are you?

12   Is she from London? Yes, she is.

13   Is he a shop assistant? No, he isn't. 14 Are you from France? No, I'm not.

15 His phone number is 772541. 16 My teacher and I are 30.

my/your, he/she/they, his/her

2    His

3    They

4    your

5    She's

6    They're

7    He's


Questions and answers

1    2 c 3 a 4b 5d 6g

2    2 1*There's she from?

3    What's her job?

4    How old is she?

5    What's her phone number? 6 Is she married?

Negatives

2    She isn't a nurse.

3    Karl isn't from Canada.

4    Julie isn't 29.

5    1'm not married.

6    Jim and Sue aren't students. 7 They aren't in New York.

Plurals

2    We're English.

3    They're sandwiches.

4    They're students.

5    They're from the United States.

6    We aren't on tour.

7    Are they doctors?

Numbers

1    6 SIX             8 eight    10 ten

       I one             4 four          7 seven

2    two  9 mne

      5 five             3 three

2 2 eleven                        6 thirty

3   twenty-eight  7 thirteen

4   twenty         8 fifteen

5   foUrteen

Vocabulary

Jobs

Everyday things

nurse student teacher businessman shop assistant taxi driver police officer

sandwich

television camera bag computer hamburger

1

2 2 Japan

6 England

3 Australia

7 Italy

4 France

8 the United States

5 Spam

9 Brazil

Translate

The idea behind this is that students begin to be aware of the similarities and differences between English and LI.

Emphasize that they must not translate word by word. Obviously it will only be possible to check their answers in a monolingual class but even in a multilingual class students can discuss their answers in nationali ty groups.


Prepositions

 

       2 at                6 at

10 at

 

Correct the mistakes

       3 in                7 on

Il

by

Correct the mistakes

2    My sister's husband is a doctor.

3    The children live in London.

4    by 8 on

5    in 9 In

 

 

2 My son is a student and I don't see him very often.

4 He has a new car•

Times and

 

 

3 That's a photo of my children and

5 Our car is Italian.

prices

 

 

me.

6 How Old are you?

3 It's twelve o'clock

 

 

4 She lives in an old house.

7 I like tennis.

4 It's eleven thirty.

 

 

5 There are three magazines on the

8 I don't speak German very well.

5 It's nine forty-five.

 

 

table.

9 She lives in Tokyo.

6 It's two twenty.

 

 

6 There aren't any good restaurants in

10 We have a big house.

7 Ifs four fifty-five.

 

 

this area.

Il They don't like Chinese food.

8 It's ninety-five p,

 

 

7 There isn't a computer in the living

12 Where does she work?

9 It's one pound thirty-five.

 

room,

13 My husband doesn't work in an

10 It's twelve pounds seventy-two.

8 Are there any nice shops in the city

office.

Il It'S sixty-eight pounds forty-one.

centre?

14 Do they speak French?

12 It's ninety-nine pounds ninety-nine-

9 I was born in 1985.

15 What sports does she like?

 

10 Where were you born?

16 We never drink wine.

Vocabulary - countries and nationalities

Il The weather wasn't very good

 

Nationality

England

Portugal

Spain

France

Germany

Italy

Brazil the united States Japan

English

Portuguese

Spanish

French

German

Italian

Brazilian

American

Japanese

yesterday.

Questions and negatives12 She played tennis yesterday morning,

How do you spell your name?                                                                                                        went on holiday last week 13 She

3    How many sisters does he have?14 Where did you go skiing?

4    What food does she like?15 VThat did you have for breakfast? 5 Where do you have lunch?16 Did you buy a newspaper yesterday?

6    What music do you like?

7    How many languages do theyQuestions and answers speak?2k 3f 4a 5j 6i 7c 8h 9d IOe I l g 8 What time do you get up?

Stop and check 2

Photocopiable

9      


What drinks do the children like?

10    What time does Helen go to bed?there is/are

 

11

Where does your teacher come

 

2 There is

5 Is there

 

from?

Vocabulary - words that go together

3 There are

6 Are there

Do they have a house in the centre?

They don't have a house in the

listen to music get up late

4 there isn't

7 there aren't

 

centre,

drink coffee work in an office

Past Simple

 

2

Does he speak three languages?

stay at home

2 lived

7 left

 

He doesn't speak three languages.

go shopping

3 went

8 worked

3

Do you get up early?

have a shower

4 wanted

9 joined

 

You don't get up early,

walk to work

5 didn't like

10 was

4

Does Victoria have lunch in her office?

play the piano

6 loved

Il had

 

Victoria doesn't have lunch in her office.

Vocabulary - word groups

Irregular verbs

 

Adjectives

Places

Sports

beautiful

funny favourite nice small great

studio college office classroom flat farm school restaurant university

skiing tennis swimming football

2

                                                            5 Does he go to bed late?saw                                                                               6 took

3

He doesn't go to bed late.got 7 sald 4 did   8 ate 6 Do we have lessons at 7.30?

5 bought

We don't have lessons at 7.30. 7 Do your parents drink wine?

was/ were/did/didn't

Your parents don't drink wine.

                                                         8 Does she speak English well?2 was                                                                             6 didn't

She doesn't speak English well.3 Were 7 wasn't 9 Does he cook lunch?     4 Did 8 weren't

                                                              He doesn't cook lunch.5 weren't                                                                       9 didn't

Translate

See note about translatiðn on PI 45.


Questions and negatives

2    Is therea CD player in the living room? There isn't a CD player in the living room.

3    Was she born in 1980?

She wasn't born in 1980. 4 Was hea good student?

He wasn't a good student.

5    Did we stay at home last weekend?

We didn't stay at home last weekend.

6    Did you go to bed early last night?

You didn't go to bed early last night.

Vocabulary

Adjectives

Rooms

furniture

¥ple

jobs

¥rts

activities

cheap

hot delicious fast lovely

lamp kitchen shower cooker

armchair

painter princess writer musician singer president

sailing baseball dancing skiing tennis cards

Translate

See note about translation on p 145.

COrrect the mistakes

2     I can speak French.

3     She wants to send an email.

4     'I'd likea coffee, please.' 'Here you

5     'Would you like to come to my party?' 'Yes, please.' 6 I like shopping.

7      We are learning English.

8      What are you wearing?

9      He isn't working today.

10  I'm doing my homework now.

Il That's my father over there. He's wearing a black hat.

12   Where do you come from?

13   We're going on holiday next month14 Are you working tomorrow?

15 We had a good time last weekend. 16 How long did you stay in Spain?

Questions and answers

1     2e 3d 4i 5a 6b Th 8g 9c

2     2 What             7 What time

3     Where               8 How much

4     How  9 How many

5     Why  10 How old

6     Who   Il When

Stop and check 4

like

2    do      7 doesn't

3    Would                8 can't

4    1'd like               9 sailing

5    wants                10 can

6    buy     11 We like

Past, present, and future

2    am playing

3    Do play

4    plays

5    started

6    didn't like

7    Are interested

8

9      went

10   Did have

Il travelled

12   visited

13   Are going

14   are going

15   lives

16   are staying

Vocabulary - word groups

Food

Clothes

Col ours

Transport

fish fries ham cheese steak

jeans jacket jumper T-shirt trousers

red yellow grey white brown

bicycle plane underground train ship

Translate

See note about translation on p 145.


Present Simple and Continuous

3 phones

8 are sitting

4 's wearing

9 watch

5 Do...getup

10 Are working

6 has

Il 'S raining

7 is doing

12 do ... go

Present Continuous for future

2    are getting married / church

3    Are . collecting / tickets

4    am meeting / friends

5    are having / restaurant

6    is travelling / train

7    are going / cinema

@                                            Photocopiable


New Headway Beginner

The world's most trusted English course

New Headway is the course teachers and learners can rely on. Why? An authoritative integrated syllabus, motivati ng topics, and clearly focused tasks combine with a real understanding of what works in the classroom. It all makes for effective teaching and effective learning. Tried and tested all over the world, it's probably the most popular course ever written !

In the Teacher's Book, full support for the teacher

Crystal-clear lesson plans

    Thorough and informative coverage of grammar points Hints and ideas for preparation and remedial work

How to deal with likely problems and common errors

    Additional photocopiable materials, Stop and Check reviews, and Prog ress Tests

'It? clear and easy, without being oversimplified.

PLUS a range of components for teachers and learners

    Cl ass CDs/cassettes

Workbook (with or without key)

    Student's Workbook CD/cassette

    DVD/Video, with student's activity book

    Headway offline: interactive exercises available at www.oup.com/elt/headway

    Online ideas and materials for teachers at

Teachers around the world comment on New Headway Beginner . . .

'The progreggi0h is just the kind beginners need.

' a lively and conteMporary approach combined with topical and humorous topics for digcuggi0h and pairwork.


colourful, with photos of people from all walks of life that, even at beginner level, create scope for dialogue and student exchange. '

www.oup.com/elt/teacher/headway

Teacher's Resource Book, with extra photocopiable activities for every unit

Liz and John Soars are internationally renowned authors, and highly experienced teachers and teacher trainers.

OXFORD

UNIVERSITY PRESS



[1] I wasn't born in 1989.

[2] David didn't play baseball at school.  I didn't have a big lunch.

@                                            Photocopiabte